Contents

Mini SE Countryman 2018 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 296
1 of 296

Summary of Content for Mini SE Countryman 2018 Owner's Manual PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN PLUG- IN HYBRID.

Contents A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

MINI Owner's Manual for the vehicle Thank you for choosing a MINI. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID5 X/17, 11 17 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 284. The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication can be called up via the follow ing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, Online Owner's Manual, MINI Driver's Guide app.

6 Information

AT A GLANCE 16 Cockpit 20 Central Information Display (CID) 29 Voice activation system 32 General settings 43 Owner's Manual media 47 MINI eDRIVE 49 Safety of the hybrid system

CONTROLS 52 Opening and closing 73 Settings 84 Transporting children safely 89 Driving 109 Displays 130 Lights 136 Safety 155 Driving stability control systems 159 Driving comfort 177 Climate control 186 Interior equipment 193 Storage compartments 196 Cargo area

DRIVING TIPS 206 Things to remember when driving 211 Saving fuel

MOBILITY 218 Charging the vehicle 226 Refueling 229 Fuel 231 Wheels and tires 246 Engine compartment 249 Engine oil 253 Coolant 255 Maintenance 257 Replacing components 267 Breakdown assistance 272 Care

REFERENCE 280 Technical data 282 Appendix 284 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Information Using this Owner's Manual Orientation The fastest way to find information on a partic ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif ferences may exist between the printed Own er's Manual and the following Owner's Man uals: Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Online Owner's Manual. MINI Motorers Guide App. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain ment, and Communication can be obtained as printed book from the service center. The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication can be called up via the follow ing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Online Owner's Manual. MINI Motorers Guide App.

Additional sources of in formation Dealers service center A dealers service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.

Internet The Owner's Manual and general Information about MINI, for example on technology, are available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de scribes features and functions found in the ve hicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. Additional in formation, refer to page 43.

MINI Motorers Guide app The app specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets. Addi tional information, refer to page 44.

Online Owner's Manual The Online Owner's Manual specifically de scribes features and functions found in the ve hicle. The Online Owner's Manual can be dis played in any of today's browsers. Additional information, refer to page 45.

Seite 6

Information

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Symbols and displays Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Symbol Meaning

Precautions that must be followed. To avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

End of a specific item of information.

Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

"..." Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

... Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system..

... Answers generated by the voice activation system.

Action steps Action steps to be carried out are presented as numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order.

1. First action step. 2. Second action step.

Enumerations Enumerations without mandatory order or al ternative possibilities are presented as list with bullet points. First possibility. Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components Refers to the relevant section of this

Owner's Manual for further information on a particular part or assembly.

The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of orange-colored high-voltage components results in the risk of life-threatening injury from electric shock.

Vehicle features and op tions This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates features and functions that are not available in your vehicle, for example be cause of the selected optional features or the country-specific version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob served. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple mentary Owner's Manuals. Your dealers service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle.

Seite 7

Information

7Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Status of the Owner's Manual Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif ferences may exist between the printed Own er's Manual and the following Owner's Man uals: Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Online Owner's Manual. MINI Motorers Guide App. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety Manufacturer The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Intended use Follow the following when using the vehicle: Owner's Manual. Information on the vehicle. Do not remove

stickers. Technical vehicle data. The traffic, speed, and safety laws where

the vehicle is driven. Vehicle documents and statutory docu

ments.

Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require ments applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten tially differing operating conditions and regis tration requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information on warranty is available from a dealers service center.

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a MINI dealers service center. If you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of a facility that performs work, for instance maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop". If work is performed improperly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub sequent damage and related safety risks.

Parts and accessories The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of parts and accessory products ap proved by the manufacturer of the MINI. Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center. MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

Seite 8

Information

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen uine MINI parts and accessories. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suita ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning California laws require us to state the following warning: Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo bile components and parts, including compo nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re lated accessories contain lead and lead com pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol lowing warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or re gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi cle to meet different prevailing operating con ditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable war ranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Cus tomer Relations for further information.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for required maintenance meas ures: MINI Maintenance system. Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models. Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models. If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War ranty.

Data memory General information Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the ve hicle to function safely or provide assistance during driving, for instance driver assistance

Seite 9

Information

9Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

systems. Furthermore, control devices facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. Electronic control devices contain data memo ries, which are able to temporarily or perma nently store information about the condition of the vehicle, component load, maintenance re quirements, technical events or faults. This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system or the environ ment, for instance: Operating states of system components,

e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat tery status.

Status messages for the vehicle and its indi vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational speed, wheel speed, deceleration, trans verse acceleration, engaged safety belt in dicator.

Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes.

Information on vehicle-damaging events. Responses by the vehicle to special situa

tions such as airbag deployment or en gagement of the stability control systems.

Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.

The data is required to perform the control de vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions. The majority of this data is transient and is only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small proportion of the data is stored in event or fault memories and, if needed, in the vehicle key.

Reading out data When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and quality assurance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle together with the vehicle identification number. A dealers service center or another qualified service cen

ter or repair shop can read out the information. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis re quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out the data. The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the serv ice network. The data documents the technical conditions of the vehicle, helps in locating faults and improving quality, and is transferred to the vehicle manufacturer, if needed. Furthermore, the manufacturer has product monitoring duties to meet in line with product liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle manufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. Fault and event memories in the vehi cle can be reset when a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work. Data on the scope of servicing work performed and maintenance records are stored in the ve hicle by means of the service history and trans ferred to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle owner can contact a dealer's service center to object to the data being stored and transferred to the vehicle manufacturer. This objection ap plies for as long as the vehicle owner remains the proprietor of the vehicle.

Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, some data can be transferred into the vehicle when using comfort and infotainment functions, for instance: Multimedia data such as music, films or

photos for playback in an integrated multi media system.

Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system.

Entered navigation destinations. Data on the use of Internet services.

Seite 10

Information

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been connected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time. This data is only transmitted to third parties if expressly desired. This depends on the personal settings selected for using online services. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol lowing comfort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified at any time, for instance: Settings for the seat and steering wheel po

sitions. Suspension and climate control settings. Individual settings, for instance lighting in

the car's interior.

Control via mobile devices Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile devices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements. The sound and picture from the mobile device can be played back and dis played through the multimedia system. Certain information is transferred to the mobile device at the same time. Depending on the type of connection, this includes, for instance position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work. There is no further interaction between the mo bile device and the vehicle, for instance active access to vehicle data. How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information If the vehicle has a wireless network connec tion, this enables data to be exchanged be tween the vehicle and other systems. The wire less network connection is realized via an in- vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehi cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless net work connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manu facturer are concerned, the corresponding functions are described in the appropriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or man ufacturer's website. The relevant legal informa tion pertaining to data protection is provided there too. Personal data may be used to per form online services. Data is exchanged over a secure connection, for instance with the IT sys tems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. Any collection, processing, and use of personal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual ar rangement or consent. In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates anonymized information on transport infra structure and how the infotainment system is used. This information cannot be traced back to individual vehicles or people. Evaluating the data enables the manufacturer to further im prove its products or services, for instance by incorporating the most up-to-date traffic bulle tins. The data transfer feature can be deacti vated in the vehicle. Certain services and func tions, some of which are subject to a charge, can be deactivated by the driver. It is also pos sible to activate or deactivate the data connec tion as a whole. That is, with the exception of

Seite 11

Information

11Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

functions and services required by law such as Assist systems.

Services from other providers When using online services from other provid ers, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data pri vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this process. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under standing how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were

operating. Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened. How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal. How fast the vehicle was traveling. This data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re corded by the EDR under normal driving condi tions and no personal data, for instance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

The vehicle identification number can be found on the type label, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Seite 12

Information

12 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe rcar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 13

Information

13Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

WATCH ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Cockpit Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows69 2 Exterior mirror operation81 3 Buttons of the central locking system57 4 Lights

Front fog lights133

Light switch130

Lights off Daytime running lights132

Parking lights130

Low beams130

Automatic headlight control131 Cornering light132 High-beam Assistant132 Instrument lighting133

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Seite 16

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Camera-based cruise control on/ off159

Cruise control on/off165

Cruise control: store speed

Pausing, continuing cruise control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control: re duce distance

Camera-based cruise control: in crease distance

6 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal97

High beams, head light flasher97

High-beam Assistant132

Canada: roadside parking light131

Onboard Computer121

7 Instrument cluster109 8 Steering column stalk, right

Windshield wipers101

Rain sensor102

Cleaning windows99

Rear window wiper100

Clean the rear window100

9 Steering wheel buttons, right Voice activation29

Telephone

Confirm the selection121

Move selection up121

Move selection down121

Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Adjust the steering wheel83 12 Unlock hood247 13 Operate the tailgate60

Seite 17

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

17Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

14 Tank vent226

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system267

Intelligent Safety146

2 Control Display20 3 Radio/Multimedia 4 Glove compartment193 5 Climate control177 6 PDC Park Distance Control167

Rearview camera170 Parking assistant173 eDRIVE92

Starting/stopping the engine, switching drive-ready state modes and the ignition on/ off89 DSC Dynamic Stability Con trol155

MINI Driving Modes switch157

7 Steptronic transmission selector lever105 8 Controller with buttons21 9 Parking brake95

Seite 18

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request

2 Indicator light, front-seat passen ger airbag139

3 Reading lights134

4 Ambient light134

5 Panoramic glass sunroof70

6 Interior lights134

Seite 19

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

19Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Central Information Display (CID) Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller or touchscreen.

Safety information WARNING Operating the integrated information sys

tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci dent. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. If necessary, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Control elements Overview

1 Control Display with touchscreen 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on

the equipment version, with touchpad

Control Display

General information To clean the Control Display, follow the care in structions, refer to page 275. In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to intense so lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the tem perature is reduced, for instance through shade or air conditioning, the normal functions are re stored.

Safety information NOTE Objects in the area in the front of the

Control Display can shift and damage the Con trol Display. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.

Switching on 1. Switch on the ignition.

Seite 20

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

2. Press the Controller.

Switching off

1. Press button. 2. "Turn off control display"

Controller with navigation system

General information The buttons can be used to open the menus di rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. Some functions of the Central Information Dis play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 26:

Operation Turn.

Press.

Move in four directions.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: call up main menu.

Press twice: open recently used me nus.

Open the Communication menu.

Open the Media/Radio menu.

Open destination input menu for navi gation.

Open navigation map.

Open the previous display.

Open the Options menu.

Seite 21

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

21Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Controller without navigation system

General information The buttons can be used to open the menus di rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. Some functions of the Central Information Dis play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 26:

Operation Turn.

Press.

Move in two directions.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: call up main menu. Press twice: open recently used me nus.

Open the Communication menu.

Open the Media/Radio menu.

Open the previous display.

Open the Options menu.

Operating with the Con troller Opening the main menu

Press button.

The main menu is displayed. All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Seite 22

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the Controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, for in stance "System settings".

Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears. Move the Controller to the left.

Closes the current display and shows the previous display.

Press button. The previous display opens.

Move the Controller to the right. New display is opened.

The arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Opening recently used menus The recently used menus can be displayed.

Press button twice.

Opening the Options menu Press button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The Options menu consists of various areas: Screen settings, for instance "Split screen". Control options for the selected main

menu, for instance for "Media/Radio". If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, for instance "Save station".

Changing settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting

is displayed.

3. Press the Controller.

Seite 23

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

23Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

Function is activated. Function is deactivated.

Entering letters and numbers

General information Letters and numbers can be entered via the Controller. The keyboard's display changes automatically.

Input 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num

bers. 2. : confirm entry.

Symbol Function

Press the Controller: delete let ters or number.

or

Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers.

Switching between upper/lower case, numbers and characters Depending on the menu, you can switch be tween entering upper and lower case letters and numbers: Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or

Change between capital and lower-case letters.

Without navigation system Select the symbol.

Entry comparison When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter en tered and letters may be added automatically. Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle. Only those letters are offered during entry

for which data is available. Destination search: place names can be en

tered in all languages that are available on the Control Display.

Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which there is an entry are dis played at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.

2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. The first entry of the selected letter is dis played.

Operating via touch screen General information The Control Display is equipped with a touch screen. Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use any objects.

Opening the main menu Tap on symbol.

Seite 24

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Tap desired menu item.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, for in stance "System settings".

Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, a new display opens.

The arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Swipe to the left. Tap on symbol. New display is opened.

Opening recently used menus 1. Tap on symbol. 2. Tap on symbol.

Changing settings Settings such as volumes can be changed via the touchscreen. Slide in the selected field to the right or left,

until the desired setting is displayed. , Tap on symbol.

Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is acti vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

Function is activated. Function is deactivated.

Entering letters and numbers

General information Letters and numbers can be entered using the Controller or the touchscreen. The keyboard's display changes automatically.

Seite 25

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

25Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Symbol Function

Tapping the symbol: delete the letter or number.

Tapping and holding the symbol for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Switching between upper/lower case, numbers and characters

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or

Change between capital and lower-case letters.

Operating navigation map The navigation map can be moved with the touchscreen. Function Operation

Enlarge/shrink map.

Drag in or out with the fin gers.

Touchpad General information Some functions of the Central Information Dis play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller:

Selecting functions 1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Touchpad" 4. Select the desired function.

"Speller": enter letters and numbers. "Map": using the map.

"Search fields": write letters without se lecting the list field.

"Audio feedback": pronounces entered letters and numbers.

Entering letters and numbers Entering letters requires some practice at the beginning. When entering, pay attention to the following: The system distinguishes between upper

and lower-case letters and numbers. To make entries, it may be necessary to change between upper and lower-case let ters, numbers and characters, refer to page 24.

Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display.

Always enter associated characters, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. The set language deter mines what input is possible. Where neces sary, enter special characters via the Con troller.

To delete a character, swipe to the left on the touchpad.

To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in the center of the touchpad.

To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the upper area of the touchpad.

To enter an underscore, swipe to the right in the lower area of the touchpad.

Using the map The map in the navigation system can be moved via the touchpad. Function Operation

Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di rection.

Enlarge/shrink map.

Drag in or out on the touch pad with fingers.

Display menu. Tap once.

Seite 26

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Split screen General information Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, for instance infor mation from the Onboard Computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when switching to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off

1. Press button. 2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display The display can be selected in menus, where the split screen is supported.

1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. Select the desired setting.

Specifying the number of displays It is possible to specify the number of displays.

1. Move the Controller to the right until the split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller. 3. "Personalize menu" 4. Select the desired setting. 5. Move the Controller to the left.

Status information General information The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status information is dis played in the form of symbols.

Status field symbols

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being received.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular network. Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Contacts are loaded.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Music collection.

AUX-IN port.

Bluetooth audio.

Seite 27

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

27Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Symbol Meaning

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

iPod.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has been switched off.

Encrypted connection not active.

Request for the current vehicle posi tion.

Programmable memory buttons General information The Central Information Display (CID) functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and menu entries. Settings are stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Storing a function 1. Select the function via the Central Informa

tion Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds.

Running a function Press button.

The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The button assignment is displayed at the top edge of screen.

Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for

approx. 5 seconds. 2. "OK"

Seite 28

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Voice activation system Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept Most functions displayed on the Control Display can be operated by voice commands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements during input.

General information Functions that can only be used when the

vehicle is stationary can only be operated via the voice activation system to a limited extent.

The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.

... in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha sis, and speed.

Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.

Functional requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi fied. To set the language, refer to page 32.

Using the voice activa tion system Activating the voice activation system

1. Press button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or Cancel.

Possible commands General information Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. Commands from other menus can also be spo ken. You may select list entries such as phone list entries via voice activation. Read these list en

Seite 29

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

29Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the respective list.

Displaying possible commands The following is displayed in the top area of the Control Display: Some possible commands for the current

menu. Some possible commands from other me

nus. Status of the voice recognition. Encrypted connection is not available.

Help on the voice activation system To have information on the operating prin

ciple of the voice activation system read out loud: General information on voice control.

To have help for the current menu read out loud: Help.

Example: opening the tone settings The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the Controller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if needed.

2. Press button on the steering wheel. 3. Media and radio 4. Tone

Settings Setting the voice dialog You can set the system to use standard dialog or a short version.

The short version of the voice dialog plays back short messages in abbreviated form.

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Speech mode:" 5. Select the desired setting.

Selecting the input language For some languages, the input language can be selected.

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Voice control:" 5. Select the desired setting.

Activating voice recognition via the server The voice recognition feature via the server provides a dictation function and a natural method of entering destinations while improv ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is transmitted to a service pro vider via an encrypted connection and stored locally there.

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Server speech recognition"

Speaking during voice output It is possible to answer during inquiries of the voice activation system. The function can be deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably interrupted, for instance due to background noise or talking.

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings"

Seite 30

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

3. "Language" 4. "Speaking during voice output"

Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the spoken in structions until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed. The volume is stored for the profile cur

rently used.

Information on Emer gency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a phone connection.

Environmental condi tions Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun

roof closed to prevent noise interference. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle

while speaking.

Seite 31

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

31Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

General settings Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Language Setting the language Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Language" 4. "Language:" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re fer to page 30.

Time Setting the time zone Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time"

4. "Time zone:" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Setting the time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours

are displayed. 6. Press the Controller. 7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi

nutes are displayed. 8. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Setting the time format Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Time format:" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Seite 32

AT A GLANCE General settings

32 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Date Setting the date Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Date:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is

displayed. 6. Press the Controller. 7. Make the settings for the month and year. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Setting the date format Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Date and time" 4. "Date format:" 5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Setting the units of measurement You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, fuel consumption, distan ces and temperature. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Units" 4. Select the desired menu item. 5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Activating/deactivating popup windows For some functions, popup windows are dis played automatically on the Control Display. Some of these popup windows can be acti vated or deactivated. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Pop-ups" 4. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Control Display Brightness Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Control display" 5. "Brightness at night" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright

ness is set. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used. Depending on the light conditions, the bright ness settings may not be clearly visible.

Seite 33

General settings AT A GLANCE

33Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Screensaver If no entries are made via the Central Informa tion Display (CID), a screensaver can be dis played after an adjustable time. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Control display" 5. "Screensaver" 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Messages Concept The menu centrally displays all messages arriv ing in the vehicle in list form.

General information The following messages can be displayed: Traffic messages. Check Control messages. Communication messages, for example e-

mails, SMS text messages or reminders. Service requirements messages. Messages are additionally displayed in the sta tus field.

Retrieving messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications" 2. Select the desired message. The respective menu is opened, where the message is displayed.

Deleting messages All messages, except Check Control messages, can be deleted from the list. Check Control messages are displayed as long as they are rel evant. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications" 2. Select the desired message.

3. Press button. 4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all

notifications"

Settings The following settings can be adjusted: Select the applications, from which mes

sages will be permitted. Sort the messages according to date or pri

ority. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Notifications" 4. Select the desired setting.

Data protection Data transfer

Concept The vehicle offers various functions which re quire data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.

General information With data transfer deactivated, the respective function cannot be used. Only make these settings while stationary.

Seite 34

AT A GLANCE General settings

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Activating/deactivating the data transfer Follow the instructions on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Switch on the ignition. 2. "My MINI" 3. "System settings" 4. "Data privacy" 5. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Concept Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently deleted via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol lowing data is deleted: Driver profile settings. Stored radio stations. Stored programmable memory buttons. Travel and Onboard Computer information. Music collection. Navigation, for instance stored destina

tions. Phone book. Office data, for instance voice notes. Login accounts. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data Heed and follow the instructions on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Switch on the ignition. 2. "My MINI" 3. "System settings" 4. "Data privacy" 5. "Delete personal data" 6. "Delete personal data" 7. "OK" 8. Exit and lock the vehicle. After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com pleted. If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the deletion.

Canceling deletion Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.

Connections Concept Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.

General information The following overview shows possible func tions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device.

Seite 35

General settings AT A GLANCE

35Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Function Connection type

Making calls via the hands-free system. Using phone functions via the Central Information Display (CID). Using the smartphone Office functions.

Bluetooth.

Playing music from the smart phone or the audio player.

Bluetooth or USB.

Using compatible apps via the Central Information Display (CID).

Bluetooth or USB.

USB storage device: Exporting and importing driver profiles. Performing software updates. Playing music.

USB.

Playing videos from the smart phone or the USB storage de vice.

USB.

Using Apple CarPlay apps via the Central Information Display (CID) and voice operation.

Bluetooth and WiFi.

The following connection types require one- time pairing with the vehicle: Bluetooth. Apple CarPlay Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.

Safety information WARNING Operating the integrated information sys

tems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci dent. Only use the systems or devices when the

traffic situation allows. If necessary, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information Information on mobile devices compatible with the vehicle can be found at www.miniusa.com/ bluetooth. Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the vehicle. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. "Bluetooth info" 6. "System information" A software update, refer to page 41, can be performed, if needed.

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements Compatible device, refer to page 36, with

Bluetooth interface. The remote control is in the vehicle. The device is ready for operation. Bluetooth is activated on the device and in

the vehicle, refer to page 37. Bluetooth pre-settings, such as visibility,

may be required on the device; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Seite 36

AT A GLANCE General settings

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Switching on Bluetooth Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. "Bluetooth"

Activating/deactivating telephone functions To use all supported functions of a mobile phone, the following functions must be acti vated prior to pairing. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. Select desired setting:

"Office" Activate function to transmit short mes sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes, and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can be incurred by transmitting all data to the vehicle.

"Contact images" Activate function to show the contact pictures.

6. Move the Controller to the left.

Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Connect new device" 5. Select the functions for which the device

will be used:

"Telephone" "Bluetooth audio" "Apps" "Apple CarPlay" The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis played on the Control Display.

6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity of the mobile device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile device display. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered. Compare the control number displayed

on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device. Confirm the control number on the de vice and on the Control Display.

Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Cen tral Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Frequently Asked Questions, refer to page 37.

Frequently asked questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as ex pected. In this case, the following explanations can help: Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected? There are too many Bluetooth devices con

nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec tions with other devices.

Seite 37

General settings AT A GLANCE

37Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search.

The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life. Charge mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer react? The applications on the mobile phone do

not function anymore. Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

Possibly too high or too low ambient tem peratures for mobile phone operation. Do not subject the mobile phone to ex treme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)? The mobile phone may not be properly

configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio device. Connect the mobile phone with the tele phone or additional phone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entries dis played or why are they incomplete? Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete. It is possible that only the phone book en

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks.

The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

Data volume of the contact too large, for instance due to stored information such as notes. Reduce the data volume of the contact.

A mobile phone can only be connected as audio source or as telephone.

Configure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone or additional phone function.

How can the phone connection quality be im proved? The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.

Insert mobile phone into the wireless charging tray.

Adjust the volume of the microphone and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, con tact the hotline, a dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.

USB connection

General information Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to the USB interface. Mobile phones. Audio devices with USB port, for instance

MP3 player. USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

The following applications are possible: Exporting and importing driver profiles, re

fer to page 63. Playing music files via USB audio. Playing videos via USB video. Loading of software updates, refer to

page 41. Follow the following when connecting: Do not use force when plugging the con

nector into the USB interface. Use a flexible adapter cable. Protect the USB storage device against me

chanical damage.

Seite 38

AT A GLANCE General settings

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Due to the large number of USB media available on the market, it cannot be guar anteed that every device is operable on the vehicle.

Do not expose USB media to extreme envi ronmental conditions, such as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB storage device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.

A connected USB storage device will be supplied with charging current via the USB interface if the device supports this.

To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is con nected to the USB interface.

Depending on how the USB storage device is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media: USB hard drives. USB hubs. USB memory card readers with multiple in

serts. HFS-formatted USB media. Devices such as fans or lamps.

Functional requirement Compatible device, refer to page 36, with USB interface.

Connecting the device Connect the USB storage device using a suita ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to page 191. The USB storage device is connected to the ve hicle and displayed in the device list.

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation and the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements Compatible iPhone, refer to page 36.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. Corresponding mobile wireless contract. Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are

switched on on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. Select the following settings:

"Bluetooth" "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing iPhone with CarPlay Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to page 37, via Bluetooth Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis played in the device list, refer to page 40.

Operation For more information, see the Integrated Own er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, MINI Driv er's Guide app or the Owner's Manual for Navi gation, Entertainment, and Communication.

Frequently asked questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite

Seite 39

General settings AT A GLANCE

39Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

that, the mobile device does not function as ex pected. In this case, the following explanations can help: The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is established, CarPlay can no longer be selected. Delete the iPhone concerned from the de

vice list. On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con

cerned from the list of stored vehicles un der Bluetooth and under WiFi.

Pair the iPhone as a new device. If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact the hotline, a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Managing mobile devices

General information After one-time pairing, the devices are au

tomatically recognized and reconnected when the ignition is switched on.

The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle after recognition.

For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device list All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" A symbol indicates, for which function a device is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Additional telephone"

"Bluetooth audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the device Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select the desired device. 5. Select the desired setting. If a function is assigned to a device, the func tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device The connection of the device to the vehicle is disconnected. The device remains paired and can be con nected again, refer to page 40. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device. 5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device A disconnected device can be reconnected.

Seite 40

AT A GLANCE General settings

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device. 5. "Connect device" The functions that were assigned to the device before disconnecting are assigned to the de vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al ready connected, these functions are deacti vated.

Deleting the device Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device. 5. "Delete device" The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.

Swapping the telephone and additional phone If two mobile phones are connected to the ve hicle, the functions of the phone and additional phone can be switched. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Mobile devices" 4. "Settings" 5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."

Software update

General information The vehicle supports a large number of mobile devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3 players. Software updates are available for

many of the supported devices. The vehicle is maintained up-to-date via regular vehicle soft ware updates. Updates and related current information is available on the Internet at www.mini.com/ update.

Displaying the installed software version The software version installed in the vehicle is displayed. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Software update" 4. "Show current version" If an update has been carried out before, select the desired version to display additional infor mation.

Updating software via USB The software may only be updated when the vehicle is stationary. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Store the file for the software update in the main directory of a USB flash drive.

2. Connect the USB data storage to a USB in terface.

3. "My MINI" 4. "System settings" 5. "Software update" 6. "Update software" 7. "USB" 8. "Install software" 9. "OK" 10. Wait for the update to complete. 11. Confirm system restart.

Seite 41

General settings AT A GLANCE

41Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Restoring the software version The software version before the last software update and the version before the first software update can be restored. The software may only be restored when the vehicle is stationary. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Software update" 4. "Restore software" 5. "Previous version"

The previous software version is re stored.

"Default software settings" The first software version is restored.

6. "Remove software" 7. "OK" 8. Wait for restore. 9. Confirm system restart.

Seite 42

AT A GLANCE General settings

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Owner's Manual media Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information You can use various media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual. The follow ing Owner's Manual media formats are availa ble: Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 43. Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle,

refer to page 43. MINI Motorers Guide App, refer to

page 44. Online Owner's Manual, refer to page 45. There are different features, refer to page 46, in each of the different media formats.

Printed Owner's Manual Concept The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional fea tures offered with the series.

General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain ment, and Communication can be obtained as printed book from the service center.

Supplementary Owner's Manuals Also follow the instructions of the Supplemen tary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard literature.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Concept The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de scribes features and functions found in the ve hicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual

1. Press button. 2. "My MINI" 3. "Owner's Manual" 4. Select the required method of accessing the

contents.

Scrolling through the owner's manual Turn the Controller, until the next or previous contents are displayed.

Context help

General information The section of the Owner's Manual relating to the function that is currently selected can be displayed directly.

Seite 43

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

43Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Opening via Central Information Display (CID) Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display:

1. Press button. 2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display:

"Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To switch from a function, for instance radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:

1. Press button. 2. "Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4. Press button again to return to last displayed function.

5. Press button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To alternate continuously between the last dis played function and the last displayed page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro grammable memory buttons and called up di rectly.

Storing 1. Select the desired entry point via the Cen

tral Information Display (CID): "Quick reference" "Search by pictures" "Keyword search" "Animations"

2. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds.

Executing Press button. The Owner's Manual is displayed im

mediately.

MINI Motorers Guide app Concept The app specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets.

General information The Owner's Manual is available in many coun tries as an app for iOS or Android in the respec tive Store. Entering the vehicle identification number fil ters the contents.

Vehicles It is possible to store Owner's Manuals for vari ous vehicles in the app. It is also possible to test the app using a dem onstration vehicle.

Operating systems and language The app is available for the iOS and Android op erating systems.

Seite 44

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The Owner's Manual is downloaded in the lan guage of the device.

Online Owner's Manual Concept The Online Owner's Manual specifically de scribes features and functions found in the ve hicle. The Online Owner's Manual can be displayed in any of today's browsers.

General information The Online Owner's Manual is available in many countries. An account on the customer portal may be required. Entering the vehicle identification number fil ters the contents.

Vehicles It is possible to store several individual Owner's Manuals for various vehicles.

Language The language is based on whichever language is set in the operating system.

Printing You can use the print function for automatically formatting and printing out individual chapters.

Media components General information The following components are not available to the same extent in all media formats. Additional information on availability, refer to page 46.

Quick Reference Guide The Quick Reference Guide provides informa tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use basic vehicle functions and what to do in case of a breakdown.

Search by illustrations Based on illustrations, image search provides information and descriptions. This is helpful when the terminology for a feature is not at hand.

Frequently asked questions This chapter provides answers to frequently asked questions about your vehicle and helpful links to additional information.

Quick links The chapter on quick links explains the most important information and operating instruc tions on the basis of various situations.

Videos The videos explain the main functions of the systems.

Smart Scan You can use Smart Scan to scan various sym bols in the vehicle. After a brief explanation of the symbol in question appears, it is then possi ble to display the chapter directly. Smart Scan is only available for the iOS operat ing system.

Keyword search You can use keywords to search for information and descriptions in the media.

Seite 45

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

45Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Key features

Printed Integrated APP Online

All equipment included. X

Equipment included in vehicle. X X X

Quick Reference Guide. X X X

Search by illustrations. X X X

Frequently asked questions. X X

Quick links. X X

Videos. X X X

Smart Scan. X

Keyword search. X X X X

X: included. : not included.

Seite 46

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

MINI eDRIVE Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hybrid system Concept This MINI is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to the combustion engine, the vehicle features a high- voltage system that consists of an electric mo tor and a high-voltage battery among other things. The hybrid system can move the vehicle purely electrically. It can also support the combustion engine in certain situations.

General information The vehicle does not consume any fuel while driving purely electrically. This enables environ mentally friendly driving without emissions in inner-city traffic. If the combustion engine is used, the hybrid system support reduces fuel consumption even further. In addition to this, the electric motor acts as an alternator: during braking and coasting, it con verts the vehicle's kinetic energy into electrical energy. The electrical energy is stored in the high-voltage battery and is used to drive the electric motor.

The vehicle can be charged, refer to page 218, via the charging socket at charging stations or household sockets.

Overview

1 Combustion engine 2 Control-system electronics, electric motor 3 Electric motor 4 High-voltage cables: orange 5 High-voltage battery 6 Charging socket 7 Vehicle battery

Functions while driving

Electric driving: ePOWER. Under certain conditions, refer to page 93, the vehicle is powered only by the electric mo tor.

Variable drive type The combustion engine drives the front axle and the electric motor the rear axle. Depending on the operating condition, the vehicle has the options of front-wheel drive, rear-wheel drive or bundled for four-wheel drive. Follow the information about electric driving ePOWER, driving with the combustion engine POWER, and the driving stability control sys tems.

Seite 47

MINI eDRIVE AT A GLANCE

47Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Assistance from the electric motor Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en ergy. To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel consumption, the electric motor boosts the combustion engine, refer to page 95. To do this, the electric motor uses the energy saved in the high-voltage battery.

Driving with the combustion engine: POWER The combustion engine, refer to page 94, provides the main drive power to move the ve hicle. If necessary, the high-voltage battery is charged at the same time. The hybrid system always starts the combus tion engine automatically.

Auto Start/Stop function, coasting The Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 92, switches the combustion engine off while the vehicle is moving, when braking, when rolling to a halt, and while the vehicle is stopped. The condition of rolling with the com bustion engine switched off is referred to as coasting. Convenience functions such as the automatic climate control are supplied by the high-voltage battery and can remain switched on.

Energy recovery: CHARGE The high-voltage battery of the hybrid system is charged through energy recovery while driving. The electric motor acts as a generator and con verts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into elec trical energy, refer to page 95.

Charging the vehicle The high-voltage battery of the vehicle can be charged, refer to page 218, via the charging socket at charging stations or household sock ets.

Regular and complete charging of the high- voltage battery reduces the fuel consumption by using electric energy.

Climate control while parking and charging The hybrid system makes it possible to operate the automatic climate control prior to driving off and with the combustion engine switched off. During vehicle charging or if the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, the car's interior can be can be cooled or heated in advance of the trip, refer to page 224. The stationary climate control can also be switched on directly.

Display The displays of the hybrid system provide infor mation about the current state of hybrid opera tion.

Energy-saving driving To save energy while driving, read the following descriptions: Saving fuel, refer to page 211. Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to

page 212. GREEN Mode. Adapting to the course of the road.

Safety of the hybrid system Follow the information on safety, refer to page 49.

Long-term vehicle storage Observe the information on vehicle storage and for longer idle periods, refer to page 275.

Seite 48

AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety of the hybrid system Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Working on the hybrid system General information The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that no changes be made to the vehicle, forin stance the retrofitting of accessories, that will have an effect on the vehicles hybrid system.

Safety information DANGER Improperly executed work, in particular

maintenance and repair on the high-voltage system, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to life. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that the work on the vehicle, in particular main tenance and repair, be performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

Hybrid system Contact with water The hybrid system is typically safe even in the following example situations: Water in the footwell, for instance after a

rainstorm when sunroof was kept open. Vehicle is in water but only up to the al

lowed height. Fluid escapes in the cargo area.

Automatic deactivation If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is switched off automatically to prevent risk of danger to occupants and other road users. Read the information on What to do after an accident, refer to page 270.

Seite 49

Safety of the hybrid system AT A GLANCE

49Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

HANDLE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Opening and closing Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Remote control General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con trols with integrated key. Each remote control contains a replaceable battery. Replacing the battery, refer to page 54. You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country-specific ver sion. Settings, refer to page 65. The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Driver profile, refer to page 63. The remote controls hold information about re quired maintenance. Service data in the remote control, refer to page 255.

Safety information WARNING People or animals in the vehicle can lock

the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the remote control with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

WARNING Unlocking from the inside is only possible

with special knowledge. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi cle while being exposed to extreme tempera tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

WARNING Unattended children or animals can

cause the vehicle to move and endanger them selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol lowing actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button. Releasing the parking brake. Opening and closing the doors or windows. Engaging selector lever position N. Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Unlocking the tailgate

Seite 52

CONTROLS Opening and closing

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

With automatic tailgate operation: open the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking Press button on the remote control.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 65, the following access points are unlocked. Driver's door.

Press the button of the remote control again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

All doors and tailgate. In addition, the following functions are exe cuted: The settings stored in the driver profile, re

fer to page 63, are applied. The driver's seat is set to the last position

saved in the driver's profile. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 65.

The interior lights, courtesy lights and the MINI logo projection are switched on. These functions are not available if the inte rior lights were switched off manually.

The welcome lights are switched on, if this function was activated.

Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open.

The alarm system, refer to page 67, is switched off.

The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

Convenient opening Press and hold this button on the re mote control after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the remote control is pressed.

Locking 1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press button on the remote con trol. All doors and the tailgate are locked. The alarm system, refer to page 67, is switched on.

3. Press and hold this button on the remote control in the area close to the ve hicle after locking. The exterior mirrors are folded in.

If the drive-ready state is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop but ton.

With Comfort Access: convenient closing

Safety information WARNING With convenient closing, body parts can

be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing Press and hold this button on the re mote control in the area close to the

vehicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the remote control is pressed. The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Seite 53

Opening and closing CONTROLS

53Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Switch on interior lights and courtesy light

Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched on. These functions are not available if the interior lights were switched off manually. The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing the button again.

Tailgate

General information To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. Depending on your vehicle's equipment and the country version, it is possible to specify whether the doors are also unlocked when un locking with the remote control. Adjusting the settings, refer to page 65.

Safety information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat

ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTE The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit

the rear window and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob jects do not hit the rear window.

Opening Press and hold button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

Without automatic tailgate operation: The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up ward. With automatic tailgate operation: The tailgate opens automatically.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote control and hold for at least 3 seconds.

Briefly press the button on the remote con trol three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery 1. Remove the integrated key from the re

mote control, refer to page 56. 2. Slide the integrated key into the opening

and raise the cover. The battery compartment is accessible.

Seite 54

CONTROLS Opening and closing

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

4. Push battery in the direction of the arrow using a pointed object and lift it out.

5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi tive side facing up.

6. Insert lid and cover. 7. Push the integrated key into the remote

control until it engages. Have old batteries disposed of by a dealers service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop or

take them to a collection point.

Additional remote controls Additional remote controls are available from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of the remote controls A lost remote control can be blocked and re placed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Malfunction

General information A Check Control message is displayed. Remote control detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances: The battery of the remote control is dis

charged. Replacing the battery, refer to page 54.

Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. Do not transport the remote control to gether with metal objects.

Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the remote control. Do not transport the remote control to gether with electronic devices.

Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for in stance charging of a mobile phone.

The remote control is in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray. Place the remote control down at a differ ent location.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 56.

Seite 55

Opening and closing CONTROLS

55Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Switching on the drive-ready state via emergency detection of the remote control

It is not possible to start the engine if the re mote control has not been detected. It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the remote control has not been de tected. Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the remote control as shown against the marked area on the steering column. Pay attention to the display in the instru ment cluster.

2. If the remote control is detected: Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec onds.

If the remote control is not detected, slightly change the position of the remote control and repeat the procedure.

Integrated key General information The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without remote control using the integrated key.

Safety information WARNING Unlocking from the inside is only possible

with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi cle while being exposed to extreme tempera tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

NOTE The door lock is permanently joined with

the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door lock 1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.

Seite 56

CONTROLS Opening and closing

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi cle is locked with the integrated key. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock. In order to stop this alarm, un lock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control, refer to page 55.

Buttons for the central locking system General information In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking Press the button with the front doors closed.

The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

Unlocking Press button.

Opening

Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest.

Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors re main locked.

Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time un locks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access Concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

General information Comfort Access supports the following func tions: Unlocking and locking the vehicle. Convenient closing. Open the tailgate. Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch

activation.

Functional requirements To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle near the doors.

Seite 57

Opening and closing CONTROLS

57Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 65, only the driver's door may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking with the remote control, press ing the button on the outer door handle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again. If a door of a locked vehicle was opened from the inside via the door opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle first locks the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door handle must be pressed again. This is the case whether the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or via the central locking system button from the inside.

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information WARNING With convenient closing, body parts can

be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed. The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Opening the tailgate

General information If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked. To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Safety information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat

ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Seite 58

CONTROLS Opening and closing

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

NOTE The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit

the rear window and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob jects do not hit the rear window.

Opening

Press button next on tailgate.

Without automatic tailgate operation: The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up ward. With automatic tailgate operation: The tailgate opens automatically.

Opening and closing the split doors with no-touch activation

Concept The tailgate can be opened and closed with no- touch activation using the remote control you are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-di rected foot motion in the center of the area at the rear of the vehicle and the tailgate is opened or closed.

General information To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. If the remote control is in the sensor area, the tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot movement. The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi cle. If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activa tion, locked doors are not unlocked.

Safety information WARNING During no-touch activation, vehicle parts

may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas system. There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do not touch the vehicle.

WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat

ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTE The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Performing the foot movement 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at

about an arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direc tion of travel and immediately pull it back.

Seite 59

Opening and closing CONTROLS

59Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors.

Opening Perform the foot movement described earlier. Before the opening, the hazard warning system flashes. Moving your foot again will stop the opening motion, and moving it one more time after that will close the tailgate.

Closing Perform the foot movement described earlier. Before closing, the hazard warning system flashes and an acoustic signal sounds. Moving your foot again will stop the closing motion, and moving it one more time after that will re-open the tailgate.

Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances: The battery of the remote control is dis

charged. Replacing the battery, refer to page 54.

Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. Do not transport the remote control to gether with metal objects.

Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the remote control. Do not transport the remote control to gether with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock ing request recognition function on the door handles. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 56.

Tailgate General information To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. Depending on your vehicle's equipment and the country version, it is possible to specify whether the doors are also unlocked when un locking with the remote control. Adjusting the settings, refer to page 65.

Safety information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat

ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTE The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTE Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit

the rear window and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property.

Seite 60

CONTROLS Opening and closing

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob jects do not hit the rear window.

Without automatic tailgate operation

Opening from the outside

Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the remote control with you. Press button next on tailgate.

Press and hold button on the re mote control for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re mote control, refer to page 54.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up ward.

Opening from the inside With Steptronic transmission: With the vehicle stationary, press the

button in the storage compartment of the driv er's door upward. If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission: With the vehicle stationary, pull the

button in the storage compartment of the driv er's door upward twice in quick succession.

Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tail gate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

With automatic tailgate operation

Opening

Adjusting the opening height You can set how far the tailgate should open. When adjusting the opening height, ensure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Tailgate" 5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired

opening height.

From the outside

Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

Seite 61

Opening and closing CONTROLS

61Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the remote control with you. Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

Press and hold button on the re mote control for approx. 1 second.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted opening height.

From the inside With Steptronic transmission: Pull button in the storage compartment

of the driver's door upward. If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission: With the vehicle stationary, pull the but

ton in the storage compartment of the driver's door upward twice in quick succession.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens automatically to the adjusted opening height.

Interruption of the opening procedure The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol lowing situations: When the vehicle starts moving. By pressing the button on the outside of

the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tail gate.

By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By pressing the button on the remote con trol. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By pressing or pulling the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door. Pulling again continues the opening mo tion.

Closing

From the outside Press the button on tailgate's exterior.

From the inside Press and hold the button in the storage compartment of the driver's door.

The remote control must be located in the car's interior for this function. An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is closed.

From inside the tailgate Without Comfort Access:

Press button on the inside of the tailgate.

With Comfort Access:

Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the tailgate.

Press button, arrow 2. The vehicle will be locked after closing the tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the remote control

Seite 62

CONTROLS Opening and closing

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

must be outside of the vehicle in the area of the tailgate.

Interruption of the closing procedure The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol lowing situations: If the vehicle starts off with a jerky move

ment. By pressing the button on the outside of

the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tail gate.

By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.

By releasing the button in the storage com partment of the driver's door. Pressing again and holding continues the closing motion.

Malfunction

Safety information WARNING With manual operation of a blocked tail

gate, it can release itself unexpectedly from the blockage. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not operate the tail gate manually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Manual operation Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow and smooth motion. To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly only. Closing occurs automatically.

Driver profile Concept In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev eral drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

General information There are three driver profiles with which per sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re mote control has one of these driver profiles assigned. If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied. If several drivers use their own remote control, the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur ing unlocking. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different remote control. Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently activated. If another driver profile is selected via the Cen tral Information Display (CID), the settings stored in it will be applied automatically. The new driver profile is assigned to the remote control currently used. There is an additional guest profile available that is not assigned to any remote control: it can be used to apply settings in the vehicle without changing the personal driver profiles.

Functional requirements For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the de tected remote control must be clearly allocated to the driver. This is the case when: The driver is only carrying his or her own re

mote control. The driver unlocks the vehicle.

Seite 63

Opening and closing CONTROLS

63Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.

Settings The settings for the following systems and func tions are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment. Unlocking and locking. Lights. Radio. Instrument cluster. Programmable memory buttons. Volumes, tone. Control Display. Climate control. Navigation. PDC Park Distance Control. Rearview camera. Head-up Display. MINI Driving Modes. Intelligent Safety. Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi

tion. Both the positions saved via the seat mem ory and the last position set are saved.

Profile management

Selecting a driver profile Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif ferent driver profile may be activated. This al lows you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your own remote control. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile. 4. "OK"

All settings stored in the called-up driver profile are automatically applied.

The called-up driver profile is assigned to the remote control being used at the time.

If the driver profile is already assigned to a different remote control, this driver profile will apply to both remote controls.

Using a guest profile The guest profile is for individual settings that are stored in none of the three personal driver profiles. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. "Drive off (guest)" 4. "OK" The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the current remote control.

Renaming a driver profile A personal name can be assigned to the active driver profile to avoid confusion between the driver profiles. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this sym bol can be renamed.

4. "Change driver profile name" 5. Enter profile name. 6. Select the symbol.

Resetting a driver profile The settings of the driver profile currently in use are reset to their factory settings.

Seite 64

CONTROLS Opening and closing

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this sym bol can be reset.

4. "Reset driver profile" 5. "OK"

Exporting driver profiles Most settings of the active driver profile can be exported. Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving personal settings, for instance before delivering the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver profiles can be taken into another vehicle. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this sym bol can be exported.

4. "Export driver profile (USB)" Select USB storage device as needed.

Importing driver profiles Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be imported via the USB interface. The existing settings of the active driver profile are overwritten with the settings of the im ported driver profile. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.

The driver profile marked with this sym bol can be overwritten.

4. "Import driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed. 5. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Displaying driver profiles during start The driver profiles can be displayed during each start to select the desired profile. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. "Show driver profiles at startup"

System limits A clear assignment between the remote control and driver may not be possible in the following cases, for example. The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his

or her own remote control, but another person is driving.

The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Access and has multiple remote controls with him or her.

The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.

Multiple remote controls are located out side of the vehicle.

Settings General information Depending on your vehicle's equipment and the country version, various settings for open ing and closing are possible. These settings are stored for the driver profile, refer to page 63, currently used.

Seite 65

Opening and closing CONTROLS

65Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Unlocking

Doors Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" 5. Select desired setting:

"Driver's door only" Only the driver's door is unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehi cle.

"All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. Select desired setting:

"Tailgate" Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the tailgate is either unlocked or opened.

"Tailgate and door(s)" Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the tailgate is either unlocked or opened and the doors unlocked.

Depending on optional features and country version, this setting is not offered in some cases.

Adjusting the last seat and mirror position Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile. The setting can be made for the driver

profile marked with this symbol. 4. "Last seat position automatic" When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi tions. The most recent position is independent of the positions saved via the seat memory.

Automatic locking Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. Select desired setting:

"Lock automatically" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened after unlocking.

"Lock after starting to drive" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Automatic unlocking Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Doors/Key" 4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings"

Seite 66

CONTROLS Opening and closing

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

3. "Doors/Key" 4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir

mation signals. "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one.

With alarm system: "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Alarm system General information When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes: Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood

or the tailgate. Movements in the car's interior. Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at

tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.

Disconnected battery voltage. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Di

agnosis. The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically: Acoustic alarm.

Depending on local regulations, the acous tic alarm may be suppressed.

By switching on the hazard warning system. By flashing the daytime running lights.

Overview

Indicator light in the roof fin.

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/off When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either with the remote control or with Comfort Access, the alarm system is switched off and on at the same time.

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock. Switching off the alarm, refer to page 68.

Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are

Seite 67

Opening and closing CONTROLS

67Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote control and hold for at least 3 seconds.

Briefly press the button on the remote con trol three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator lights The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds: The alarm system is switched on.

Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec onds: Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured. When the still open access points are closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

The indicator light goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator light flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: In automatic vehicle washes. In duplex garages. During transport on trains carrying vehicles,

at sea or on a trailer. With animals in the vehicle. At the gas station: if the vehicle is locked af

ter refueling starts. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor can be switched off in such situations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi

cle is locked. The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the remote control

or switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, re fer to page 55.

With Comfort Access: If you have the re mote control with you, unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or pas senger side door.

Seite 68

CONTROLS Opening and closing

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Power windows General information If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed except a gap.

Safety information WARNING When operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Power windows

Safety switch

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is being held.

Press the switch beyond the resist ance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening via the remote control, re fer to page 53.

Closing

Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is being held.

Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient closing via the remote control, refer to page 53. Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 58.

Jam protection system

General information If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a window closes, closing is interrupted. The window opens slightly.

Safety information WARNING Accessories on the windows such as an

tennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol lows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

Seite 69

Opening and closing CONTROLS

69Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The window closes with limited jam protec tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without jam protection.

Safety switch

General information The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, for instance from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the safety function is switched off automatically.

Switching on/off Press button. The LED lights up if the safety function

is switched on.

Malfunction

General information In certain situations a window can only be op erated to a limited extent. After a power failure during the opening or

closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case.

The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a window is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the overheating pro tection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the degree of overheating, it may only be possible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all. In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.

Initializing the system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. During initialization, the affected window closes without jam protection.

WARNING When operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistance point and hold. The window closes.

3. Continue holding the switch pulled to the resistance point. The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sun roof General information In the event of a severe accident, the glass sun roof is automatically closed.

Safety information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat

ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos ing.

Seite 70

CONTROLS Opening and closing

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroof Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it. The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it twice. The glass sunroof is opened. Pressing the switch again stops

the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Slide switch back to the re sistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

Press the switch back beyond the resist ance point and release it. The glass sunroof is opened. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's in terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position. Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun roof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised posi tion.

Press the switch forward beyond the resist ance point and release it. The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Press the switch forward beyond the resist ance point and release it twice. The glass sunroof is closed. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it. The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

General information If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter rupted.

Seite 71

Opening and closing CONTROLS

71Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system If there is an external danger, proceed as fol lows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

2. Push the switch forward again past the re sistance point and hold until the glass sun roof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power interruption After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI recommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

Seite 72

CONTROLS Opening and closing

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Settings Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Sitting safely An ideal seating position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the event of an accident, the correct seating position plays an important role. Follow the in formation in the following chapters: Seats, refer to page 73. Safety belts, refer to page 76. Head restraints, refer to page 78. Airbags, refer to page 136.

Front seats Safety information

WARNING Seat adjustments while driving can lead

to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING With a backrest inclined too far to the

rear, the efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright posi tion as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam age to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad justment.

Manually adjustable seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward 2 Thigh support 3 Height 4 Backrest tilt

Seite 73

Settings CONTROLS

73Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly making sure it engages prop erly.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease the curvature.

Electrically adjustable seats

General information The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the profile currently used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the function, refer to page 66, is activated for this purpose. The current seat position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 80.

Overview

1 Memory function 2 Lumbar support 3 Backrest tilt 4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Seite 74

CONTROLS Settings

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Forward/backward

Push switch forward or backward.

Height

Push switch up or down.

Seat tilt

Move switch up or down.

Backrest tilt

Move switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support

Concept The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Settings Press the front/rear section

of the button: The curvature is increased/ decreased.

Press the upper/lower sec tion of the button: The curvature is shifted up/ down.

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

Seite 75

Settings CONTROLS

75Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on Press button once for each tempera ture level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au tomatically with the temperature selected last. When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to page 213, the heater output is reduced.

Switching off Press and hold the button, until the LEDs go out.

Rear seats Safety information

WARNING There is a risk of jamming when folding

down the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of move ment of the center armrest is clear during fold ing down.

WARNING Unexpected movements of the backrest

while driving may occur due to unintentional unlocking of the rear backrests by the straps. There is a risk of injury. Do not fasten any ob jects to the straps for unlocking the rear back rests.

Backrest tilt

Pull the strap and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Safety belts Number of safety belts and safety belt buckles The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en sure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly. The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right. The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is intended for the person sitting in the middle.

General information Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. Al though airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear from the belt buckle on the side.

Seite 76

CONTROLS Settings

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information WARNING Use of a safety belt to buckle more than

one person will potentially defeat the ability of the safety belt to serve its protective func tion.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be transported and secured in designated child re straint systems.

WARNING The efficacy of safety gear, including

safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional inju ries, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts cor rectly.

WARNING The efficacy of safety gear, including

safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations: The safety belts or safety belt buckles are

damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.

Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealers service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to

your body over your lap and shoulders. Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over

your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach.

Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.

Avoid thick clothing. Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up

ward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt 1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the

holder when fastening it. 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt

buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up

mechanism.

Seite 77

Settings CONTROLS

77Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Middle safety belt in the rear

Buckling the safety belt

1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts in the roof.

2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 1.

3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt buckle, arrow 2. Safety belt buckles must audibly click into place.

Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open

the second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.

4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the roofliner.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt

reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Front head restraints Safety information

WARNING A missing protective effect due to re

moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Before driving, install the removed head re

straints on the occupied seats. Adjust the head restraint so its center sup

ports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.

Adjust the distance so that the head re straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the back rest tilt as needed.

WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving

the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

WARNING Objects on the head restraint reduce the

protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Do not use seat or head restraint covers. Do not hang objects, for instance clothes

hangers, directly on the head restraint.

Seite 78

CONTROLS Settings

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Only use accessories that have been deter mined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.

Do not use any accessories, for instance pil lows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John Cooper Works sport seat The height of the head restraints cannot be ad justed.

Adjusting the height

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

To raise: push the head restraint up. After setting the height, move the head re straint up or down slightly, making sure it en gages properly.

Removing: John Cooper Works sport seat The head restraints cannot be removed.

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Fold the seat backrest forward if needed. 2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the

head restraint out completely.

Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Rear head restraints Safety information

WARNING A missing protective effect due to re

moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Before driving, install the removed head re

straints on the occupied seats. Adjust the head restraint so its center sup

ports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.

Adjust the distance so that the head re straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the back rest tilt as needed.

WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving

the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Seite 79

Settings CONTROLS

79Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

WARNING Objects on the head restraint reduce the

protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. Do not use seat or head restraint covers. Do not hang objects, for instance clothes

hangers, directly on the head restraint. Only use accessories that have been deter

mined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.

Do not use any accessories, for instance pil lows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

To raise: push the head restraint up. After setting the height, move the head re straint up or down slightly, making sure it en gages properly.

Fold down

To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.

Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 198, in question.

2. Pull head restraint up against the resist ance.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Memory function Concept The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory func tion: Seat position. Exterior mirror position. Height of the Head-up Display.

General information Different settings can be assigned to two mem ory locations.

Seite 80

CONTROLS Settings

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored.

Safety information WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam age to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad justment.

WARNING Using the memory function while driving

can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory function when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview

Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position.

3. Press button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings The stored position is called up automatically. Press selected button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a switch for setting the seat or one of the memory buttons is pressed. While driving, the seat position adjustment on the driver's side is interrupted after a short time.

Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi tions is deactivated to save battery power. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: Open or close the door or tailgate. Press a button on the remote control. Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors Exterior mirrors

General information The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automat ically retrieved if the function, refer to page 66, is activated for this purpose. The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 80.

Safety information WARNING Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. The distance to the traffic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Seite 81

Settings CONTROLS

81Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Overview

1 Settings 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically Press button. The mirror movement follows the but ton movement.

Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.

Folding in and out NOTE Depending on the vehicle width, the ve

hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

Press button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap prox. 15 mph/20 km/h. Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations:

In vehicle washes. On narrow roads. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's inte rior mirror, refer to page 83, are used to con trol this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror position.

Seite 82

CONTROLS Settings

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

In the mirror glass. On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements Keep the photocells clean. Do not cover the area between the interior

mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel Safety information

WARNING Steering wheel adjustments while driving

can lead to unexpected steering wheel move ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

Settings

1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi tion.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 83

Settings CONTROLS

83Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Transporting children safely Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

The right place for children Safety information

WARNING Unattended children or animals can

cause the vehicle to move and endanger them selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol lowing actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button. Releasing the parking brake. Opening and closing the doors or windows. Engaging selector lever position N. Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Always transport children in the rear seat

General information Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat. Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Chil dren 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint

system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, and size.

Safety information WARNING The safety belt cannot be fastened cor

rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint sys tems. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional inju ries, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure chil dren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General information Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 138.

Seite 84

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety information WARNING Active front-seat passenger airbags can

injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

WARNING The stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re straints or remove them.

Installing child re straint systems General information Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems.

Safety information WARNING The protective effect of damaged child

restraint systems or of child restraint systems exposed to an accident and their fastening sys tems can be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, for instance in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneu vers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have damaged child restraint systems or of child restraint systems exposed to an accident and their fastening systems checked and possi

bly replaced by the dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

WARNING The stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re straints or remove them.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags WARNING Active front-seat passenger airbags can

injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au tomatically, refer to page 138.

Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully for

Seite 85

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

85Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

ward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the

safety belt. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull

it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint system. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com

pletely. In some cases it may be necessary to separate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, refer to page 76.

LATCH child restraint fixing system General information LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. Pay attention to the operating and safety infor mation of the child restraint system manufac turer when installing and using LATCH child re straint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information WARNING If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems

are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se curely engaged and that the LATCH child re straint fixing system fits securely against the backrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower an chors are marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH symbols. For vehicles equipped with a middle seat: It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH posi tions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle safety belt instead for the middle seat.

Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.

Seite 86

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Install child restraint system, see manufac

turer's information. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop

erly connected.

Child restraint systems with tether strap

Safety information WARNING If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly

used for the child restraint system, the protec tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not guided across sharp edges and without twisting to the upper retaining strap.

WARNING If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro

tective effect of the child restraint system is lim ited or there is none. In particular situations, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an ac cident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked.

NOTE The anchors for the upper retaining straps

of child restraint systems are only provided for these retaining straps. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only mount child restraint systems to the upper retaining straps.

Anchors The respective symbol shows the an chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are marked

with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Anchor 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed. 2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retaining

strap between the supports of the head re straint.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

Seite 87

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

87Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Locking the doors and windows Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear Press button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the

rear.

This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 70.

Seite 88

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Driving Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Start/Stop button, drive- ready state Concept

The following ready states can be attained by pressing the Start/ Stop button: Radio-ready state on/off. Ignition on/off.

Activating/deactivating drive-ready state. To activate drive-ready state, press the brake pedal. The drive-ready state cannot be activated as long as the charging cable, refer to page 219, is connected.

Switching radio-ready state on/off The radio-ready state is activated by pressing the Start/Stop button in the following situa tions: When the engine is running. When drive-ready state is activated. When the engine is switched off automati

cally using the Auto Start/Stop function.

Some electronic systems/power consumers re main ready for operation. Radio-ready state is switched off automatically: If the driver's or front passenger door is

opened when exiting the vehicle, with drive-ready state switched off manually.

If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button.

After approx. 8 minutes. When the vehicle is locked using the central

locking system. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started.

If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are switched off or, if correspondingly equipped, the daytime running lights are switched on.

Ignition on Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in strument cluster light up for a varied length of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition off Press the Start/Stop button again without step ping on the brake. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Seite 89

Driving CONTROLS

89Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety measures The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is station ary and the engine is off: When locking the vehicle, and when the

low beams are switched on. Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off.

When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.

While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off.

When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.

The low beams switch to parking lights after approx. 10 minutes of no use. When the ignition is switched off automatically by opening or closing the driver's door, un buckling the driver's safety belt or by the auto matic switching of the low beams to parking lights, the radio-ready state remains active.

Drive-ready state When drive-ready state is activated, the vehicle is operational. Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of a running engine in conventional vehicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is equiv alent to switching the ignition off.

Drive-ready state in de tail Concept The following are the different drive-ready state variants: Electric drive-ready state, refer to

page 91.

The vehicle is powered by the electric mo tor.

Starting the combustion engine, refer to page 91. The vehicle is powered by the combustion engine.

Safety information DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila

tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con tain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accu mulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

WARNING When driving in electric mode, pedes

trians and other traffic might pay less attention to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Seite 90

CONTROLS Driving

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

WARNING Unattended children or animals can

cause the vehicle to move and endanger them selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol lowing actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button. Releasing the parking brake. Opening and closing the doors or windows. Engaging selector lever position N. Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Activating drive-ready state 1. Close the driver's door. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Depending on the prerequisite, the electric drive-ready state is possible or the engine can be started.

Electric drive-ready state

General information The vehicle is ready for driving without starting the combustion engine.

Functional requirement The electric drive-ready state is possible, if the prerequisites for electric driving, refer to page 93, are fulfilled.

Display READY indicates drive-ready state.

Combustion engine start

Functional requirements The combustion engine is started with activa tion of the drive-ready state, refer to page 91, under the following conditions: The temperature of the hybrid system is too

high or too low. The high-voltage battery has an insufficient

charge.

Driving away 1. Activate drive-ready state. 2. Engage selector lever position D, M/S or R. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Drive away.

Deactivating drive-ready state After stopping the vehicle:

1. Set the parking brake. 2. Engage selector lever position P. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. After parking the vehicle, you may hear noises due to operation of the hybrid system, such as for cooling of the high-voltage battery.

Safety measure The drive-ready state is deactivated automati cally after approx. 10 minutes when the vehicle is stationary if, with the selector lever in posi tion P or N, the driver's door has been opened and neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator pedal have been depressed.

Before driving into a vehicle wash So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash, follow instructions for going into an automatic vehicle wash, refer to page 272.

Seite 91

Driving CONTROLS

91Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Auto Start/Stop function Concept The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the combustion engine when conditions for electric driving have been met. The ignition or drive-ready state remains switched on.

General information READY is displayed in the instrument cluster. If necessary, the combustion engine starts auto matically. The combustion engine is also stopped during the trip when rolling without acceleration or braking. This driving condition, in which the ve hicle is traveling without power and energy re covery is not active, is referred to as coasting, refer to page 94. The combustion engine is not switched off au tomatically in the following situations: The combustion engine is not at operating

temperature. The transmission selector lever is in position

M/S. High-voltage battery is heavily discharged

or vehicle electrical system is heavily bur dened.

High stress of the automatic climate control in the heating or cooling phase.

The hood is unlocked. The vehicle is being optimized for the cur

rent driving style, for instance during the break-in period or after a service appoint ment.

The hybrid system is malfunctioning.

Safety mode An automatically stopped combustion engine does not start independently:

When the driver's door is open and neither the brake nor accelerator pedal are de pressed.

When the hood is unlocked. The indicator lights come on. The combustion engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, for instance when leaving it.

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The radio-ready state is activated. The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti

vated. Engage selector lever position P.

2. Set the parking brake.

Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the combustion engine automatically in the event of a malfunction. A message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the sys tem checked.

Electric driving: ePOWER. General information In ePOWER, the vehicle is driven exclusively electrically. ePOWER works automatically. Depending on the charge state of the high- voltage battery, maximum speed and range achieved can vary. For electrical driving, certain conditions, refer to page 93, must be satisfied. Displays of the hybrid system, refer to page 111.

Seite 92

CONTROLS Driving

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety information WARNING When driving in electric mode, pedes

trians and other traffic might pay less attention to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Functional requirements State of charge and temperature of the

high-voltage battery is sufficient. Selector lever position D or R engaged. The accelerator pedal is only slightly de

pressed. The possible maximum speed for electric

driving is not exceeded. The driver's door is closed. MID or GREEN driving mode is selected.

eDRIVE button

General information Using the eDRIVE button, the characteristics of the hybrid system can be adjusted. MAX eDrive, refer to page 93 Auto eDRIVE, refer to page 93 SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 94 To switch between the individual function modes, press the eDRIVE button up or down.

Overview

eDRIVE button

Auto eDRIVE

General information Auto eDRIVE is activated by default when the vehicle is started via the Start/Stop button. In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hybrid mode corresponding to the various driving sit uations, i.e. the drive combines combustion en gine and electric motor. The respectively most effective drive type is preferred.

MAX eDRIVE

General information The vehicle is driven exclusively electrically.

If necessary, the maximum electrical speed that applies to MAX eDRIVE may be deliberately ex ceeded with the aid of kickdown, refer to page 107. The combustion engine is automati cally started and the system switches to AUTO eDRIVE mode. Automatic starting of the engine while driving, refer to page 94.

Activating MAX eDRIVE Press the button up repeatedly, until MAX eDRIVE is displayed in the instru

ment cluster. When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE setting is graphically displayed on the Control Display.

Seite 93

Driving CONTROLS

93Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

SAVE BATTERY

General information The current charge state of the high-voltage battery can be maintained or increased with SAVE BATTERY. The electric range can be conserved in this

way for a later point in the trip, for instance. This charging process increases the average fuel consumption. The acceleration boost by the electric motor may be restricted. The function is only available if sufficient fuel is available and in selector lever position D.

Activating SAVE BATTERY Press the button down repeatedly, un til SAVE with the battery symbol is dis

played in the instrument cluster. When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE setting is graphically displayed on the Control Display.

Auto Start/Stop function, coasting

Concept The combustion engine is automatically stop ped and disengaged from the drivetrain. This driving condition of rolling is referred to as coasting.

Functional requirements Coasting is possible: The high-voltage battery is sufficiently

charged. Transmission position D is engaged. The drive system is at operating tempera

ture. GREEN Mode: when coasting, without oper

ating the brake, at speeds below 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h.

After coasting, the combustion or electric mo tor restarts depending on the operating state.

Acoustic pedestrian protection

Concept Depending on the country-specific version, the system generates a continuous driving noise at standstill with the drive-ready state activated and during electric driving up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the surroundings. As a result, other traffic participants, for in stance pedestrians or cyclists, can better per ceive the vehicle.

Driving with the combus tion engine: POWER Concept The combustion engine provides the main drive power to move the vehicle. If necessary, the high-voltage battery is charged at the same time.

Functional requirements

Automatic starting while driving The combustion engine is automatically started under the following conditions while driving: During intense accelerations or on uphill

grades. By pressing the accelerator pedal beyond

the resistance point at the full throttle posi tion, kickdown.

The high-voltage battery has an insufficient charge.

Selector lever position M/S is engaged. The speed for electric driving is exceeded

while accelerating.

Seite 94

CONTROLS Driving

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Adapting to the course of the road when destination guidance is activated.

System-related requirement for hybrid components.

Automatic switching off while driving When reducing speed, the combustion engine is switched off when the conditions for electric driving, refer to page 93, are met.

Assistance from the elec tric motor Concept The combustion engine provides the main drive power to move the vehicle. The electric motor provides assistance as needed with additional propulsive power.

eASSIST During normal vehicle operation, the electric motor assists the combustion engine, depend ing on the situation. This assistance reduces fuel consumption.

eBOOST Accelerating quickly, such as when passing, re quires the maximum available power from the electric motor. To do this, apply extra force to the accelerator pedal.

Energy recovery: CHARGE Concept The hybrid system makes it possible to convert kinetic energy into electrical energy during braking and coasting. This recovered energy charges the high-voltage battery. If necessary, this stored electrical energy is output to the electric motor.

General information Depending on the setting of the MINI Driving Modes switch, the high-voltage battery is charged at different speeds and the vehicle is decelerated differently while coasting.

Functional requirements Conditions such as the following must be met to recover kinetic energy: The vehicle is moving. Selector lever position D, M/S is set. The high-voltage battery is not fully

charged.

Displays in the instrument cluster Energy recovery displays in the instrument clus ter, refer to page 111.

Parking brake Concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi cle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information WARNING An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Seite 95

Driving CONTROLS

95Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

WARNING Unattended children or animals can

cause the vehicle to move and endanger them selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol lowing actions: Pressing the Start/Stop button. Releasing the parking brake. Opening and closing the doors or windows. Engaging selector lever position N. Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve hicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle Pull the switch. The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, the park ing brake is engaged automatically. Steptronic transmission: in some parking situa tions, the parking brake is automatically en gaged, when selector lever position P is en

gaged. In these cases, the parking brake is released automatically when you leave the se lector lever position P.

While driving To use as emergency brake while driving: Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator light lights up red, a signal sounds and the brake lights light up. A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selec tor lever position P is set. The LED and indicator light go out. The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars with Steptronic transmission For automatic release, step on the accelerator pedal. The LED and indicator light go out. The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator under the following conditions: Engine on. Drive mode engaged. Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling

Seite 96

CONTROLS Driving

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

using a wheel chock, for instance when leaving it.

After a power failure

Putting the parking brake into operation 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation. Any sounds associated with this are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point. Canada: the lever returns into its starting posi tion after actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "One-touch turn signal" 6. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Malfunction Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

High beams on, arrow 1. High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Seite 97

Driving CONTROLS

97Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety information WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or dam age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. Resting position of the wipers, position 0. Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi

tion 1. Normal wiper speed, position 2. Fast wiper speed, position 3. When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys tem switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down. Switching off: press the lever down until it

reaches its standard position. Brief wipe: press the lever down from the

standard position. The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information NOTE If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers

can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Seite 98

CONTROLS Driving

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standard posi tion, arrow 1. Wiping is started. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

Deactivating Press the lever back into the standard position.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor. Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor. Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information WARNING The washer fluid can freeze onto the win

dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.

NOTE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,

the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Seite 99

Driving CONTROLS

99Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on the rear window wiper Turn the outer switch upward. Resting position of the wiper, position 0. Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse

gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. In resting position: turn the switch down

ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re turns to its resting position when released.

In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re turns to its intermittent position when re leased.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept The fold-out position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un der frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or dam age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until

the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi tion.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Seite 100

CONTROLS Driving

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind shield.

2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to

their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Canada: wiper system General information Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or dam age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point. Normal wiper speed: tap up once. Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once

beyond the resistance point. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down. To switch off from fast wiper speed: press

down twice. To switch off from normal wiper speed:

press down once. Brief wipe: press down once. The lever automatically returns to its initial po sition when released.

Seite 101

Driving CONTROLS

101Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information NOTE If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers

can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever. Wiping is started. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera tion is deactivated. During trip interruption with the rain sensor switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati cally activated again.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor. Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor. Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information WARNING The washer fluid can freeze onto the win

dow at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.

NOTE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,

the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Seite 102

CONTROLS Driving

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind shield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on the rear window wiper Turn the outer switch upward. Resting position of the wiper, position 0. Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse

gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

In resting position: turn the switch down ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re turns to its resting position when released.

In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re turns to its intermittent position when re leased.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept The fold-out position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un der frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information WARNING If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or dam age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point

of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec

Seite 103

Driving CONTROLS

103Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Folding down the wipers After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind shield.

2. Switch on the ignition. 3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to

their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Washer fluid General information All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser voir. Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information WARNING Some antifreeze agents can contain

harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the in structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper ating materials into different bottles. Store op erating materials out of reach of children. United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con tainer. Use of BMWs Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.

WARNING Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on

contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res ervoir.

NOTE Silicon-containing additives in the washer

fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win dows can lead to damage to the washing sys tem. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.

NOTE Mixing different windshield washer con

centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. Do not mix different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the informa tion and mixing ratios provided on the contain ers.

Seite 104

CONTROLS Driving

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en gine compartment.

Malfunction The use of undiluted windshield washer con centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 /-15 .

Steptronic transmission Concept The Steptronic transmission combines the func tions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information WARNING An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Selector lever version

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, a trans mission with either a latching selector lever or a tap-operated selector lever is installed.

Transmission with a latching selector lever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are selected by moving the selector lever into the respective selector lever position. The selector lever engages in the selector lever positions.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode D Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper ation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

Reverse R Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.

Neutral N The vehicle may be pushed or roll without en gine power in selector lever position N, for in stance in vehicle washes, refer to page 106.

Parking position P

General information Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle.

Seite 105

Driving CONTROLS

105Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The transmission blocks the drive wheels in se lector lever position P. Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve hicle may begin to move.

Engaging selector lever positions: with a latching selector lever

General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Functional requirements The selector lever can only be taken out of se lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running.

Engaging selector lever position D, N, R, or P With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be deactivated and the shift command will not be executed. A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation: Unintentional shifting into selector lever

position P or R.

Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever posi tion.

1. To release the selector lever lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the front of the selector lever.

2. Move the selector lever into the desired po sition.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N: with a latching selector lever 1. Switch on drive-ready state. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. 3. Depress the brake pedal. 4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage

selector lever position N. 5. Release brake.

The vehicle may roll.

Seite 106

CONTROLS Driving

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Manually unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 108.

Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal be yond the resistance point at the full throttle po sition.

Sport program M/S

Concept The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driv ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.

Activating the sport program

Press the selector lever to the left out of selec tor lever position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster, for instance S1. The sport program of the transmission is acti vated. eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start Stop function are deactivated. Coasting to a stand still and braking phases are used more often to recover energy. Depending on the driving sit uation, the high-voltage battery is charged at different speeds. Fuel consumption can in crease.

Ending the Sport program Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

Concept Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.

Activating manual mode 1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se

lector lever position D, arrow 1.

2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru ment cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting To shift down: press the selector lever for

ward. To shift up: pull the selector lever rear

wards. The Steptronic transmission continues shifting automatically in certain situations, for instance when certain engine speed limits are reached.

Ending the manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 107

Driving CONTROLS

107Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is dis played, for example P.

Releasing the transmission lock manually: with a latching selector lever If the selector lever is locked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being switched on, the brake pedal being depressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed, the transmission lock can be unlocked manually: Before unlocking the transmission lock man ually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehi cle from rolling away.

1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, together with the lower retaining ring, from the cen ter console. To do so, pull the retaining ring upward at the rear edge.

2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector, if needed.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve hicle tool kit, refer to page 257, press the yellow release lever downward, see arrow.

4. Press the button on the front of the selector lever and move the selector lever back slightly. Release the release lever.

5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po sition.

For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.

Seite 108

CONTROLS Driving

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Displays Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Instrument cluster Overview

1 Displays of the hybrid system111 2 Indicator/warning lights 3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge117 5 Display/reset miles117 6 Electronic displays110

Seite 109

Displays CONTROLS

109Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems Messages, for instance Check Control Time117 External temperature117 Selection lists121 Total miles/trip odometer117

Onboard Computer121 Charging screen110

2 Selector lever position105 3 MINI Driving Modes switch status157

eDRIVE mode status92

Charging screen

1 Charging status224 2 Timer, departure time224 3 End of charging time224

Departure time with timer224 4 Stationary climate control224

Seite 110

CONTROLS Displays

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Displays of the hybrid system Displays in the instrument cluster

General information The following functions of the hybrid system are displayed: High-voltage battery charge indicator, refer

to page 111. Drive-ready state: READY, refer to

page 111. Electric driving: ePOWER, refer to

page 111. Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer to

page 111. Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer to

page 112. Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE, refer to

page 112. SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 112. The display depends on the system's operating condition.

High-voltage battery charge indicator The Onboard Computer in the instrument clus ter can indicate the charge state of the high- voltage battery.

Drive-ready state: READY READY indicates drive-ready state. For further information, see Drive-ready state in detail, refer to page 90.

Electric driving: ePOWER.

In ePOWER mode, the range for electric driving is colored yellow, arrow 1. The range high lighted in yellow can vary depending on the driving situation and eDRIVE mode. A pointer indicates the power outputted by the hybrid drive in a scale, arrow 2. If the pointer is outside the range highlighted in yellow, the combustion engine is switched on, arrow 3. For further information, refer to Electric driving: ePOWER.

Energy recovery: CHARGE

Energy recovery during coasting and braking is indicated as CHARGE in the instrument cluster depending on the driving mode, see arrow. The high-voltage battery is charged. If the high- voltage battery is completely charged, no en ergy can be recovered.

For further information, please refer to Energy recovery CHARGE, refer to page 95.

Seite 111

Displays CONTROLS

111Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Acceleration boost: eBOOST

If the electric motor supports the combustion engine, for instance during rapid acceleration, eBOOST, refer to page 95, is displayed. De pending on the available charge state of the high-voltage battery, there could be more or less eBOOST available. If the charge state of the high-voltage battery is low, eBOOST may not be available.

Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE The display becomes active after MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 93, is activated via the eDRIVE button.

SAVE BATTERY The display becomes active after SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 94, is activated via the eDRIVE but ton.

The high-voltage energy available for electric driving is conserved for a later point in the trip.

Indications on the Control Display

Current vehicle state

General information The following are displayed: Active components of the hybrid system:

Orange: energy flow of the combustion en gine. Yellow: energy flow of the hybrid system.

Vehicle states: ePOWER. POWER. eBOOST. CHARGE. Coasting. Charging.

System requirements of the hybrid system, for instance drive system not yet warmed up to operating temperature.

Driving requirement, for instance transmis sion selector lever in the M/S position.

Displaying the energy flow Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "eDRIVE"

Adapting to the course of the road

Concept When the navigation system destination guid ance is active, hybrid operation adapts to spe cific route sections. Use of the hybrid system is optional. Situations which are already underway and sit uations ahead are detected, indicated on the Control Display, and the hybrid drive is adapted and prepared for them. The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for example.

Functional requirements Selector lever position D engaged. AUTO eDRIVE hybrid mode is activated.

Seite 112

CONTROLS Displays

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Displaying the adaptation to the course of the road Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "eDRIVE"

The symbol on the Control Display indi cates that the function is active.

Display

Example: residential area or area with low speed restrictions. ePOWER electric driving is being prepared. When the residential area is reached, electric driving takes precedence. Other situations are also shown on the Control Display: Downhill gradients: the system is ready to

charge the high-voltage battery. Target zone: ePOWER electric driving is be

ing prepared. GREEN Mode:

Energy distribution: the electrical energy is conserved for a later point.

Check Control Concept The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.

General information A Check Control message is displayed as a com bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a SMS text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt re

minder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

Airbag system Airbag system and belt tensioner are not working. Have the vehicle checked immediately

by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake The parking brake is set. Release the parking brake, refer to page 96.

Seite 113

Displays CONTROLS

113Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Brake system Braking system impaired. Continue to drive moderately. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Approach control warning Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a colli

sion or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Increase distance. Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im minent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed. Intervention by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Person warning If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Orange lights

Active Cruise Control The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead. Camera-based cruise control, refer to

page 159.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you. Indicator light flashes: the conditions

are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Anti-lock Braking System ABS Braking force boost may not be work ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon ger braking distance into account. Have the system immediately checked by a dealers service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehi cle is stabilized. Reduce speed and

modify your driving style to the driving circum stances. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc tioned. Have the system checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or re pair shop. DSC, refer to page 155.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. DSC, refer to page 155, and DTC, refer to page 156.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 144.

Seite 114

CONTROLS Displays

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The indicator light lights up: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire in flation pressure or a flat tire. Follow the

information in the Check Control message. The indicator light flashes and then continu ously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire infla tion pressure can be detected. Interference caused by systems or devices

with the same radio frequency: after leav ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re set the system again.

A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 139.

Steering system Steering system in some cases not working. Have the system checked by a dealers

service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

Emissions The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos sible.

The warning light flashes under certain cir cumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfir ing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri

ous engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic con verter.

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 256.

Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive Acoustic pedestrian protection deacti vated or possibly not working. Have the system checked by a dealers

service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

Green lights

Turn signal Turn signal switched on. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb

has failed. Turn signal, refer to page 97.

Parking lights, headlight Parking lights or headlights are switched on. Parking lights/low beams, headlight

control, refer to page 130.

Front fog lights Front fog lights are switched on. Front fog lights, refer to page 133.

High-beam Assistant High-beam Assistant is switched on. High beams are switched on and off au tomatically depending on the traffic sit

uation. High-beam Assistant, refer to page 132.

Seite 115

Displays CONTROLS

115Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Cruise control The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel.

Blue lights

High beams High beams are switched on. High beams, refer to page 97.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press and hold button on signal lever.

Continuous display Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the mal function is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed con secutively. The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec onds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically.

Temporary display Some Check Control messages are hidden auto matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be dis played again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored.

SMS text messages SMS text messages in combination with a sym bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indi cator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Further help Depending on the Check Control message, fur ther help can be selected. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control" 4. Select the desired text message. 5. Select the desired setting.

"Owner's Manual" Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual.

Seite 116

CONTROLS Displays

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

"Service request" Contact a dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.

"MINI Roadside Assistance" Contact Roadside Assistance.

Messages after trip completion Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Fuel gauge The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 227.

The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached.

Odometer and trip odom eter Concept The total number of kilometers driven and the number of kilometers driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Reset the trip odometer Press the button. The odometer is displayed

when the ignition is switched off.

When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is re set.

External temperature General information If the indicator drops to +37 /+3 , a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information WARNING Even at temperatures above +37 /+3

there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.

Display The external temperature is dis played in the instrument cluster.

Time The time is displayed in the in strument cluster. The time can be set via the Cen tral Information Display (CID).

Date The date is displayed in the in strument cluster. The date can be set via the Cen tral Information Display (CID).

Seite 117

Displays CONTROLS

117Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Range Concept The range can be displayed as range for electric driving or as total range. The total range con siders the capacity of the fuel tank as well as the electric energy in the high-voltage battery. If the requirements for electric driving are not met, the total range considers the content of the fuel tank only.

Safety information NOTE With a driving range of less than

30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

NOTE If the range is too small, the norma drive

power is not available. Engine functions are not ensured. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel as soon as possible.

Display, electric range The electric range can be dis played via the Onboard Com puter in the instrument cluster.

The display indicates that the high-voltage battery is dead or the electric drive is currently not available.

Display total range With a low remaining range: A Check Control message is

displayed briefly.

The remaining range is shown on the On board Computer.

With a dynamic driving style, for instance taking curves aggressively, the engine func tion is not always ensured.

The Check Control message is continuously dis played below a certain range. As soon as a respectively low fuel tank filling level is reached, MAX eDRIVE is automatically selected to protect the combustion engine if the requirements for electric driving are met. The Steptronic Sport program is not available. You may continue driving with reduced per formance and exclusively with electric motor power. Follow further information on refueling.

Displaying the cruising range Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Range"

Current fuel consump tion Concept The current fuel consumption of the combus tion engine and of the electric motor can be displayed.

Display, electric motor The current electric consumption is displayed on the Onboard Computer.

Seite 118

CONTROLS Displays

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The current electric energy con sumption or generation can be monitored. Consumed energy: + sign Generated energy: - sign

Displaying the current fuel consumption Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Current consumption"

Service requirements Concept The function displays the service requirements and the corresponding maintenance scopes.

General information After the ignition is switched on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance. A service advisor can read out the current serv ice requirements from your remote control.

Display

Detailed information on service requirements More information on the type of service re quired may be displayed on the Control Dis play. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and le gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa tion.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally man dated inspection is approach ing.

The service deadline has al ready passed.

Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in spections. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" 4. "Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" 6. Select the desired setting. 7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Seite 119

Displays CONTROLS

119Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Speed Limit Info Speed Limit Info

Concept Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

General information The camera at the base of the interior mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road condi tions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend ing on the situation. With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the navi gation data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs. Without a navigation system, the system is sub ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traf fic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not displayed. Speed limits with extra text characters are always displayed.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri ate.

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir ror clean and clear.

Display Speed Limit Info is displayed via the Onboard Computer.

Press button on the turn signal lever several times, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed on the Info Display in the instrument cluster.

Speed Limit Info The last speed limit detected. Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out af ter curves or longer stretches of roadway.

Seite 120

CONTROLS Displays

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

With navigation system: Speed Limit Info is not available.

Without navigation system: no speed limit or cancellation is de tected.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol lowing situations: In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. When signs are fully or partially concealed

by objects, stickers or paint. When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you. When driving toward bright lights or strong

reflections. When the windshield in front of the interior

mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc.

In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.

If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect.

In areas not covered by the navigation sys tem.

When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing.

When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.

If the traffic signs are non-conforming. During calibration of the camera immedi

ately after vehicle delivery. When signs that are valid for a parallel road

are detected.

Selection lists General information With the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster the following can be displayed or operated: Current audio source. Redial phone feature. Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button on the steering wheel

Function

Move selection up.

Move selection down.

Confirm the selection.

Display

Onboard Computer Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehi cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver age values.

Seite 121

Displays CONTROLS

121Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Calling up information on the Info Display

Press and hold button on signal lever. Information is displayed in the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Info Display Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the Info Display: Total range.

Range, electric. Average consumption, fuel. Average consumption, electric. Current consumption, fuel. Current consumption, electric. Average speed. Charge state of the high-voltage battery. Date. Engine temperature display. With equipment version with Head-up Dis

play and navigation: Distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

With equipment version with Head-up Dis play and navigation: Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

Speed Limit Info. Speed. The unit of some information can be changed. Setting units, refer to page 33.

Selecting information You can select what information from the On board Computer is to be displayed on the Info Display of the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. Select the desired information. Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Information in detail

Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

High-voltage battery charge indicator

Concept Indicates the current charge state of the high- voltage battery as a percentage.

Safety information WARNING Even when it is indicated that the high-

voltage battery is discharged, the high-voltage system is always still under high voltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or change live parts, for instance orange high-

Seite 122

CONTROLS Displays

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

voltage cables, even when the batteries are dis charged.

Display

A marking is displayed when SAVE BATTERY is activated; see arrow. The marking indicates the high-voltage battery charge state that is to be maintained or achieved by means of energy re covery.

Average fuel consumption This is calculated for the period while the en gine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the Onboard Computer.

Average speed Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold button on turn signal lever.

Engine temperature display Displays the current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and engine oil temperature. As soon as the optimum operat ing temperature has been attained, the indica tor is in the center position. If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en gine, become too hot, a Check Control message is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed.

When the engine oil temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed.

Check the coolant level, refer to page 253.

With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation: distance to destination The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi gation system before the trip is started. The distance to the destination is adopted au tomatically.

With equipment version with Head-up Display and navigation: time of arrival The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started. The time must be correctly set.

Speed Limit Info Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

Onboard Computer on the Control Display

Concept The Onboard Computer displays different vehi cle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

Seite 123

Displays CONTROLS

123Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

General information Two types of Onboard Computers are available on the Control Display: "Onboard info": average values, such as the

fuel consumption, are displayed. The values can be reset individually.

"Trip computer": the values deliver an over view of a certain distance and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the Onboard Computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Onboard info" 4. "Consumption" or "Speed" 5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Trip computer" 4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.

"Reset": all values are reset. "Automatic reset": all values are

reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement Concept On the Control Display, sport instruments can be displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked before the use of the SPORT program.

Sport instruments

General information On the Control Display, values for power and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action" 3. "Sport displays" 4. "Sports instruments" Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT. 2. "Sport displays" 3. "Sports instruments"

Vehicle state The following vehicle and surrounding area data is automatically checked and evaluated in succession: Range. Engine temperature. External temperature. SPORT program state. Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is displayed.

Checking vehicle state Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Technology in action"

Seite 124

CONTROLS Displays

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

3. "Sport displays" 4. "Vehicle and surroundings" Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT. 2. "Sport displays" 3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Speed warning Concept A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued.

General information The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Warning at:" 5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed

is displayed. 6. Press the Controller.

Activating/deactivating the speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Speed warning" 5. Press the Controller.

Setting your current speed as the speed warning Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Speed warning" 4. "Select current speed" 5. Press the Controller.

LED ring on the central instrument cluster Concept The LED ring displays light animations to repre sent specific functions.

Basic displays Basic functions, for instance the tachometer, can be set to be displayed continually if so de sired.

Event displays Functions that are only displayed temporarily, for instance the volume or temperature set tings, can be set as event displays. Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This display corre sponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respec tive RPM warning thresholds.

Seite 125

Displays CONTROLS

125Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Display

Arrow 1: current RPM. Arrow 2: prewarning field. Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Basic display" or "Event display" 6. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightness The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument" 5. "Brightness at night" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright

ness is set. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Head-up Display Concept This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed. The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road.

General information Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head- up Display. For additional information, see the chapter on care.

Safety information WARNING When extending and retracting the pro

jection screen of the Head-up Display, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the projection screen is clear during opening and closing.

NOTE The Head-up Display consists of sensitive

components that can easily be scraped or dam aged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place any objects on the Head-up Display, attach to system components or plug into the system. Do not move the moving parts man ually.

Seite 126

CONTROLS Displays

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Overview

Switching the Head-up Display on/off When switching on, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is extended. When switching off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is retracted again. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Head-Up Display"

Display

Overview The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display: Speed. Navigation system. Check Control messages. Selection list from the instrument cluster. Driver assistance systems. Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Displayed information" 6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display. Settings are stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Brightness" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright

ness is set. 7. Press the Controller. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi tionally influenced using the instrument light ing, refer to page 133. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Adjusting the height Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays"

Seite 127

Displays CONTROLS

127Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Height" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height

is reached. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used. The height of the Head-up Display can also be stored using the memory function, refer to page 80.

Setting the rotation The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro tated around its own axis. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Rotation" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting

is selected. 7. Press the Controller. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Display visibility The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis play is influenced by the following factors: Certain sitting positions. Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis

play. Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. Wet roads. Unfavorable light conditions.

Country timer Concept The system provides information on how long and to what degree the vehicle was driven on inclined, uneven, unpaved or snow-covered roads, for example.

General information The system consists of the following two me nus: Country Timer: display of the gradient and

unevenness of the routes traveled. Country Timer Info: display of the best time

and total time since the last reset. Follow the notes on traveling on poor roads, re fer to page 209.

Opening the menu Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "MINI Country Timer" 3. Select the desired setting.

: display of the Country Timer. : display of the Country Timer Info.

Display of the Country Timer

Overview

Symbols for road gradient and unevenness, arrow 1.

Category, arrow 2.

Seite 128

CONTROLS Displays

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Pulse value, arrow 3.

Symbols, pulse deflection and pulse value When the vehicle is being driven on inclined or uneven roads, the corresponding symbol lights up, arrow 1. One or more pulse deflections are displayed and the pulse value increases, ar row 3.

Categories As the pulse value increases, the vehicle be comes larger and reaches various levels, ar row 2.

Display of the Country Timer Info

Best time The shortest driving time necessary to reach the highest level.

Total time The total driving time that the vehicle was driven at the highest level.

Resetting the Country Timer Info Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "MINI Country Timer" 3. "MINI Country Timer Info" 4. Select the desired setting.

"Reset record time and display": reset ting the best time.

"Reset total time": resetting the total time.

Vehicle status General information The status can be displayed and actions per formed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle status Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat

Tire Monitor, refer to page 144. "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 139. "Engine oil level": Electronic engine

oil level check, refer to page 249. "Check Control": Check Control mes

sages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Dis playing stored Check Control messages, re fer to page 116.

"Service required": Displaying service requirements, refer to page 119.

Seite 129

Displays CONTROLS

129Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Lights Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel.

Symbol Function

Rear fog light.

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control. Cornering light.

Symbol Function

Lights off. Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights General information Position of switch: , , If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automati cally switched off.

Parking lights Position of switch: The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Do not use the parking lights for extended peri ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis charged and it would then be impossible to start the engine. Canada: when parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer to page 131.

Low beams Position of switch: The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Lights

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Canada: roadside parking light

Concept The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and headlight courtesy de lay feature Welcome lights

General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating Position of switch: , Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "Welcome lights" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Headlight courtesy delay feature

General information The low beams stay illuminated for a particular time if the high beams are switched on after radio-ready state is switched off. Canada: the low beams stay illuminated for a particular time if the headlight flasher is switched on after radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. "Pathway lighting" 6. Set length of time. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Automatic headlight control Concept The low beams are switched on and off auto matically depending on the ambient bright ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation.

General information A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

Seite 131

Lights CONTROLS

131Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Activating Position of switch: The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il luminated when the low beams are switched on.

System limits The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment of lighting conditions. For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under these conditions, you should always switch on the lights manually.

Daytime running lights General information Position of switch: , , The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. After the ignition is switched off, the parking lights light up in posi tion .

Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti vate the daytime running lights. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Exterior lighting" 5. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the remote control cur rently used.

Cornering light General information Position of switch: In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed. The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals.

Adaptive headlight range control The adaptive headlight range control compen sates for acceleration and braking operations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.

High-beam Assistant Concept The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation.

General information The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation al lows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, for instance in towns and cities. The high beams can be switched on and off at any time as usual.

Seite 132

CONTROLS Lights

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch, depending on the vehicle equipment: , Press and hold button on signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switched be tween low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instru ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 97. To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situation that require this, therefore switch off manually. The system is not fully functional in the follow ing situations, and driver intervention may be necessary: In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation. When detecting poorly-lit road users such

as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways.

In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs.

When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights Front fog lights

Concept The front fog lights work alongside the low beams to illuminate a wider area of the road way.

Functional requirement The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off Press button. The green indicator light lights up if

the front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 131, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights. When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Instrument lighting Functional requirement The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Seite 133

Lights CONTROLS

133Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Settings Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights General information Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights are controlled automatically. Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting con trols brightness of some of these features.

Overview

1 Interior lights 2 Reading lights 3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off Press button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and off manually

Press button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.

Ambient light

General information Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in terior.

Activating/deactivating Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting" 4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Ambient lighting" 6. Select the desired setting. Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Changing color Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or backward and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until

the ambient light illuminates several times: au tomatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Lighting"

Seite 134

CONTROLS Lights

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

4. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" 6. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 135

Lights CONTROLS

135Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 2 Front airbag, front passenger 3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag 5 Knee airbag

Front airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal im pacts in which safety belts alone would not pro vide adequate protection.

Side airbag In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbag In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Seite 136

CONTROLS Safety

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejec tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of the airbags

WARNING If the seat position is incorrect or the de

ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as in tended and may cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan ger to life. Follow the information on achieving the optimum protective effect of the airbag system.

Keep a distance from the airbags. Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is trig gered.

Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard.

Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.

There should be no additional persons, ani mals or objects between an airbag and a person.

Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not at tach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS devices or mobile phones.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the air bag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not place seat cushions or other objects on the front seats that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side air bags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

Never modify either the individual compo nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.

Do not remove the airbag system. Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear ing impairment in sensitive occupants. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili ties may affect the air bag system; contact MINI Customer Relations for further information. Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Seite 137

Safety CONTROLS

137Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Functional readiness of the airbag system

Safety information WARNING Individual components can be hot after

triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual compo nents.

WARNING Improperly executed work can lead to

failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in tended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by a dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function When the ignition is switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates

the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning Warning light does not come on when the

ignition is switched on. The warning light lights up continuously.

Automatic deactivation of the front- seat passenger airbags

Concept The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's re sistance. Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas senger's side are activated or deactivated.

General information Before transporting a child on the front passen ger seat, refer to the safety information and in structions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information WARNING To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag

function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passen ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator light goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion. Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or

other items to the front passenger seat un less they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.

Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint sys tem is to be installed on it.

Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.

No moisture in or on the seat.

Seite 138

CONTROLS Safety

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags. The light indicates whether the airbags are ei ther activated or deactivated.

The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac tivated.

Detected child restraint systems The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child re straint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag The explosive power that activates driver's/ front-seat passenger airbags very much de pends on the positions of the driver's/front pas senger seat. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is dis played. A message also appears on the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats WARNING There is a risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam age to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad justment.

An appropriate Check Control message is dis played.

1. Move the respective seat all the way for ward.

2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disappears. If the message continues to be displayed, re peat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a re peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Concept The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if

Seite 139

Safety CONTROLS

139Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

General information Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla tion pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature. With use of the system follow further informa tion found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 231.

Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset

was performed with the correct tire infla tion pressure.

After the tire inflation pressure was ad justed to a new value, a reset was per formed.

Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status The system status can be displayed on the Con trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is active. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" The current status is displayed.

Tire conditions

General information Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a SMS text message on the Control Display.

All wheels green System is active and will issue a warning related to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One to four yellow wheels A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheels It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. Possible causes: Malfunction. The system is being reset.

Additonal information The status control display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the actual values read; they may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.

Resetting the system Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Start the engine but do not drive off. 5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using

"Perform reset". 6. Drive away. The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol lowing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor". After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driv ing. After successful completion of the reset, the tires appear in green on the Control Display and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures." is displayed.

Seite 140

CONTROLS Safety

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Messages

General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.

Safety information WARNING A damaged regular tire with low or miss

ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol low the information on run-flat tires and con tinued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message A symbol with a Check Control message ap pears on the Control Display. Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done. No reset was performed for the sys tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. Inflation was not carried out accord ing to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

Measure 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as

needed.

2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes sage appears on the Control Display. Symbol Possible cause

There is a tire inflation pressure loss. No reset was performed for the sys tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure 1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately.

Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas station, check and correct the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, if necessary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure

Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap pears in a Check Control message on the Con trol Display.

Seite 141

Safety CONTROLS

141Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. No reset was performed for the sys tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 237, are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this

case, have the electronics checked and re placed at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information WARNING Your vehicle handles differently with a

run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in stance, your lane stability when braking is re duced, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire The possible driving range varies depending on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, its possi ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Seite 142

CONTROLS Safety

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: Greater likelihood of swerving off course. Longer braking distances. Changed self-steering properties. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in stance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi cate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci dent. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire in flation pressure. The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances.

Failure to perform a reset The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire

is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

Malfunction The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. It may

not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. Examples and recommendations in the follow ing situations: A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is

mounted: have it checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

Malfunction: have system checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

The system was unable to complete the re set. Perform a system reset again.

Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leav ing the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the

Seite 143

Safety CONTROLS

143Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in flation has not reached the level to trigger illu mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continu ously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va riety of reasons, including the installation of re placement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor Concept The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences be tween the individual wheels while driving. In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The differ ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire. The system does not measure the actual infla tion pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial

ization was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.

After the tire inflation pressure was ad justed to a new value, an initialization was performed.

Status display The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" The status is displayed.

Initialization required An initialization must be performed in the fol lowing situations: After the tire inflation pressure has been

adjusted. After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initialization When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" 4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Safety

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset". 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Messages

General information When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta bility Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information WARNING A damaged regular tire with low or miss

ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol low the information on run-flat tires and con tinued driving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes sage appears on the Control Display. Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 237, are la beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and re placed at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information WARNING Your vehicle handles differently with a

run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in stance, your lane stability when braking is re duced, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 145

Safety CONTROLS

145Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire The possible driving range varies depending on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, its possi ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: Greater likelihood of swerving off course. Longer braking distances. Changed self-steering properties. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in stance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi cate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an acci dent. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

System limits The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in

all four tires will not be recognized. There fore, check the tire inflation pressure regu larly.

Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex ternal circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.

When the system has not been initialized. When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface. Sporty driving style: spinning traction

wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety Concept Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system. The intelligent safety systems can help prevent an imminent collision. Approach control warning with City light

braking function, refer to page 147. Person warning with City light braking func

tion, refer to page 150.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust

Seite 146

CONTROLS Safety

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri ate.

WARNING Indicators and warnings do not relieve

from personal responsibility. Due to system lim its, warnings or reactions of the system may not be output or they may be output too late, in correctly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in tervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati cally active after every departure. Some Intelli gent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.

Press button briefly: The menu for the intelligent safety

system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off ac cording to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems are

switched on. The LED lights up green.

Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems are

switched off. The LED goes out.

Approach control warn ing with city light brak ing function Concept The system can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed. The system sounds a warning before an immi nent collision and activates brakes independ ently, if needed. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. A camera at the base of the interior mirror con trols the system. The approach control warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally, the approach control warning and braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys tem reactions.

General information The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation. Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h.

Seite 147

Safety CONTROLS

147Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri ate.

WARNING Indicators and warnings do not relieve

from personal responsibility. Due to system lim its, warnings or reactions of the system may not be output or they may be output too late, in correctly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in tervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir ror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving off.

Switching on/off manually Press button briefly: The menu for the intelligent safety

system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off ac cording to their respective settings.

Seite 148

CONTROLS Safety

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems are

switched on. The LED lights up green.

Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems are

switched off. The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via the Central In formation Display (CID).

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Intelligent Safety" 4. "Warning time" 5. Select the desired setting. The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display A warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision with a detected vehicle is imminent. Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarning. Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an evasive maneu ver, if necessary.

Prewarning This warning is issued, for instance when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking function Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap proaches another object at a high differential speed. The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking inter vention in a possible risk of collision. Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous forewarning.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to react. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking.When the vehi cle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle stability has not been restricted, for instance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. The driver may cancel the braking intervention by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac tively moving the steering wheel. Object detection can be restricted. Follow the limitations of the detection range and func tional restrictions.

Seite 149

Safety CONTROLS

149Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

System limits

Safety information WARNING The system can react not at all, too late,

incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively inter vene, if needed.

Detection range The system's detection potential is limited. Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. E.g., the following situations may not be de tected: Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed. Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. In tight curves. If the field of view of the camera or the

windshield are dirty or covered. If the driving stability control systems are

deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en

gine via the Start/Stop button. During calibration of the camera immedi

ately after vehicle delivery. If there are constant blinding effects be

cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, there may also be an excess of premature or unjustified warnings and reactions.

Person warning with City light braking function Concept The system can help prevent accidents with pe destrians. When driving at city speeds, the system will is sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a colli sion with pedestrians, and support this with a light braking function. The camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

General information With sufficient brightness, the system warns about possible collision danger with pedes trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking before a collision. The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is div ided into two areas:

Seite 150

CONTROLS Safety

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.

Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo cated within the central area. A warning is is sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri ate.

WARNING Indicators and warnings do not relieve

from personal responsibility. Due to system lim its, warnings or reactions of the system may not be output or they may be output too late, in correctly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in tervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir ror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is automatically active after every driving off.

Switching on/off manually Press button briefly: The menu for the intelligent safety

system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off ac cording to their respective settings.

LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again: All Intelligent Safety systems are

switched on. The LED lights up green.

Hold down button: All Intelligent Safety systems are

switched off. The LED goes out.

Seite 151

Safety CONTROLS

151Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Warning with braking function

Display If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds. Intervene immediately by braking or

make an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention The warning prompts the driver to react. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking.When the vehi cle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle stability has not been restricted, for instance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. The driver may cancel the braking intervention by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac tively moving the steering wheel. Object detection can be restricted. Follow the limitations of the detection range and func tional restrictions.

System limits

Safety information WARNING The system can react not at all, too late,

incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively inter vene, if needed.

Detection range The detection potential of the camera is lim ited. Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is sued late. E.g., the following situations may not be de tected: Partially covered pedestrians. Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of the viewing angle or contour. Pedestrians outside of the detection range. Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. In tight curves. If the field of view of the camera or the

windshield are dirty or covered. If the driving stability control systems are

deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en

gine via the Start/Stop button. During calibration of the camera immedi

ately after vehicle delivery. If there are constant blinding effects be

cause of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

When it is dark outside.

Brake force display Concept Additional brake lights indicate emergency braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce the risk of a rear-end collision.

Seite 152

CONTROLS Safety

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

General information

During normal brake application, the brake lights light up.

During heavy brake application, the flash ers additionally light up.

Alertness assistant Concept The system can detect decreasing alertness or fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver takes a break.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.

Function The system is switched on each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. After travel has begun, the system monitors certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de tected.

This procedure takes the following criteria into account: Personal driving style, for instance steering

behavior. Driving conditions, for instance length of

trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen dation to take a break.

Break recommendation If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip. After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi mately 45 minutes.

System limits The function may be limited in the following sit uations, for instance and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all: When the clock is set incorrectly. When the vehicle speed is mainly below

about 43 mph/70 km/h. With a sporty driving style, such as during

rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. In active driving situations, such as when

changing lanes frequently. When the road surface is poor. In the event of strong side winds. The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways.

Seite 153

Safety CONTROLS

153Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

PostCrash iBrake Concept In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically with out intervention by the driver in certain situa tions. This can reduce the risk of a further colli sion and the consequences thereof.

At standstill After coming to a halt, the brake is released au tomatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

Harder vehicle braking It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer tain situations to a halt quicker. To do this, for a short time the braking pressure applied when stepping on the brake pedal must be higher than the braking pressure ach ieved by the automatic braking function. This interrupts automatic braking.

Interrupting automatic braking It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva sive maneuver. Interrupt automatic braking: By pressing the brake pedal. By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Seite 154

CONTROLS Safety

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Driving stability control systems Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Anti-lock Braking System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en gine.

Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the greatest possible braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis tance to a minimum during emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by the Antilock Brake System ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control Concept Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc ing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels. A change in the drive type, refer to page 47, can be made to improve traction.

General information DSC detects the following unstable driving con ditions, for instance: Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering. Loss of traction of the front wheels, which

can lead to understeering. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 156, is a version of the DSC where for ward momentum is optimized.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can not independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING When driving with roof load, for instance

with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may not be ensured in driving-critical situations due to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driving with roof load.

Seite 155

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

155Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Indicator/warning lights The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The indicator light lights up: DSC has

malfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General information Depending on the operating state of the high- voltage system, the drive of the vehicle auto matically switches between front-wheel, rear- wheel and four-wheel drive. If DSC is deactivated, this may result in automatic change of the drive type for unstable driving situations. When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re duced during acceleration and when driving in curves. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC Press and hold this button but not lon ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC Press button. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

light go out.

Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC is de activated.

Automatic activation When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation occurs in the following situations: The vehicle has a flat tire. When activating cruise control in TRACTION

or DSC OFF mode.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control Concept DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability Control where forward momentum is opti mized. The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions, for instance unplowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited vehicle stability. When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi mum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves. Drive carefully. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads. When freeing vehicle from deep snow or

driving off from loose ground. When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC Press button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru

ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.

Seite 156

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Deactivating DTC Press button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator

light go out.

Performance Control Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle. To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used. Due to the variable drive configuration, this in tervention can be done either on the front axle, the rear axle or on both axles simultaneously.

MINI Driving Modes switch Concept The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine- tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose between three different programs. Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will ac tivate the particular program.

Operating the programs

MINI Driving Modes switch Program

SPORT MID GREEN

MID MID provides balanced tuning. With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Concept GREEN, refer to page 213, provides consistent tuning to maximize range.

Activating GREEN Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument clus ter.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activate GREEN. 2. "Configure GREEN" 3. Configure the program. This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Driving mode" 4. "Configure GREEN" 5. Select the desired setting. This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Concept Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.

Activating SPORT Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward until SPORT is displayed in the instrument clus ter.

Seite 157

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

157Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Configuring driving program Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Driving mode: GREEN, refer to page 157.

Displays

Program selection Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of pro grams, which can be selected.

Selected program The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant Concept This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with

out delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steer ing function. The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher

ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering more direct when driving at faster speeds. Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord ing to the driving program, so that a direct, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

Seite 158

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Driving comfort Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Camera-based cruise con trol Concept Using this system, a desired speed and a dis tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle accel erates or brakes automatically. If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situa tion allows. The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed. With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic trans missions: if the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again shortly thereafter, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits.

General information A camera on the interior mirror is used to de tect vehicles driving ahead. Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can not independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING The desired speed can be incorrectly ad

justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac tively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING Risk of accident due to too high speed

differences to other vehicles, for instance in the following situations: When fast approaching a slowly moving ve

hicle. Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane. When fast approaching standing vehicles. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Seite 159

Driving comfort CONTROLS

159Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

WARNING An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Set the parking brake. On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.

On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 160.

Store/maintain speed, refer to page 161.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 160. Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 162.

Reduce distance, refer to page 162.

Increase distance, refer to page 162.

Increase speed, refer to page 161.

Reduce speed, refer to page 161.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's ser ies, optional features and country specifica tions.

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir ror clean and clear.

Functional requirements

Speed range The system is best used on well-constructed roads. The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic trans missions: the system can also be activated while the vehicle is stationary. The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on Press button on the steering wheel.

Display in the instrument cluster lights up.

Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as de sired speed and displayed with symbol.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

Seite 160

CONTROLS Driving comfort

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic trans missions: when switching off while stationary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.

Press button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually Press button on the steering wheel. With the Stop&Go function for Step

tronic transmissions: when interrupting while stationary, depress the brake pedal simultane ously.

Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: When the driver applies the brakes. If selector lever position N is set. Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated

or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti vated.

If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. If the detection range of the camera is im

paired, for instance by soiling, heavy pre cipitation or glare effects from the sun.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: following a stationary period of approx. 3 seconds, after the vehicle was braked to a stop by the system.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed on the symbol. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows: Press button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired speed

is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. or button: each time it is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

or button: hold down to repeat the ac tion.

Adjusting distance

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits, braking can be late. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and main tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by braking.

Seite 161

Driving comfort CONTROLS

161Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Reduce distance Press button repeatedly until the de sired distance is set.

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.

Increase distance Press button repeatedly until the de sired distance is set.

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.

Continuing cruise control

General information An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin tentional braking or accelerating may occur. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: When the system is switched off. When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up stored speed and distance Press button with the system inter rupted. Cruise control is continued with

the stored values. The selected distance is briefly displayed in the Info Display.

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information WARNING The system does not react to traffic driv

ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There is a risk of accidents or risk

of damage to property. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control off Press and hold this button.

Or: Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, press one of the two buttons again briefly. After changing over distance control, a Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed and stored speed In addition to the indicator light, the de sired speed is displayed in the Info Dis play.

Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.

Display lights up orange: system is inter rupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

No display: system is switched off. If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not cur rently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you Selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por tion of the Info Display.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Driving comfort

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4 This value is set automatically after the system is switched on.

Detected vehicle Symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

With the Stop&Go function for Step tronic transmissions: Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has

driven away. ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate ACC as follows: By briefly pressing the accelerator pedal. By pressing the RES CNCL button. By pressing the or button.

Indicator/warning lights Symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds: Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

The system has been interrupted or dis tance control is temporarily suppressed because the accelerator pedal is being

pressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is temporarily sup pressed because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was de

tected.

Displays in the Head-up Display The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the following situations: For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-

moving road users. For red traffic lights. For cross traffic. For oncoming traffic. Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking

lighting at night.

Seite 163

Driving comfort CONTROLS

163Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle. If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis tance. It may not be possible to restore the se lected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: driving off In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example: On steep uphill grades. From bumps in the road. In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves can not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. The system has a limited detection range. Sit uations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independ ently.

Weather The following restrictions can occur under un favorable weather or light conditions: Poorer vehicle recognition. Short-term interruptions for vehicles that

are already recognized.

Seite 164

CONTROLS Driving comfort

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Examples of unfavorable weather or light con ditions: Wet conditions. Snowfall. Slush. Fog. Glare. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in stance by braking, steering or evading.

Engine power The desired speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed if the sys tem fails or was automatically deactivated. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: When an object was not correctly detected. In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. In tight curves. If the field of view of the camera or the

windshield are dirty or covered. When driving toward bright lights. Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en

gine, via the Start/Stop button. During calibration of the camera immedi

ately after vehicle delivery.

Cruise control Concept Using this system, a desired speed can be ad justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can not independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING The use of the system can lead to an in

creased risk of accidents in the following situa tions, for instance: On winding roads. In heavy traffic. On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet con

ditions, or on a loose road surface. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at con stant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 166.

Store speed, refer to page 166.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 166. Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 167.

Seite 165

Driving comfort CONTROLS

165Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Button Function

Increase speed, refer to page 166.

Reduce speed, refer to page 166.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on Press button on the steering wheel.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

The current speed is adopted as the de sired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off Press button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually When active, press the button on the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: When the driver applies the brakes. If selector lever position N is set.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti vated.

If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed Press or button in the interrupted state. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. The stored speed is displayed in the instrument cluster. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press button.

Changing the speed or button: press until the desired speed

is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. or button: each time it is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

or button: pressing it to the resist ance point and holding it accelerates or de celerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accel erate more rapidly.

Seite 166

CONTROLS Driving comfort

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Continuing cruise control

General information An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin tentional braking or accelerating may occur.

Calling up stored speed Press button on the steering wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and main tained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light Depending on how the vehicle is equip ped, the indicator light in the instru ment cluster indicates whether the sys

tem is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol. Display lights up green: system is

active, the display indicates the de sired speed.

Display lights up orange: system is inter rupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

No display: system is switched off. If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not cur rently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine power The desired speed is also maintained downhill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Con trol Concept PDC is a support when parking. When you slowly approach an object in the rear - or also in the front of the vehicle if the feature is avail able - then the object is reported through: Signal tones. Visual display.

General information The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis tances are located in the bumpers. The maneuvering range, depending on obsta cles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given in the follow ing situations: By the front middle sensors and the two

corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.

By the rear middle sensors at ap prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

When a collision is imminent.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter vene where appropriate.

Seite 167

Driving comfort CONTROLS

167Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

WARNING Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis

tance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bumpers.

Functional requirements Ensure full functionality: Do not cover sensors, for instance with

stickers, bicycle racks. Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running. The rearview camera also switches on.

With front PDC: when obstacles are de tected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on obsta cle detection can be switched off. Via the Cen tral Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Parking" 4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re

spective equipment. 5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off manually

Press park assistance button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.

WARNING

Signal tones When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E.g., if an object is detected to the left rear of the ve

Seite 168

CONTROLS Driving comfort

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo cated both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded. The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

Volume The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "System settings" 3. "Tone" 4. "Volume settings" 5. "PDC" 6. Set the desired value. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Con trol Display before a signal sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. The range of the sensors is represented in col ors: red, green and yellow. When the image of the rearview camera is dis played, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information WARNING The system can react not at all, too late,

incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively inter vene, if needed.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances: For small children and animals. For persons with certain clothing, for in

stance coats. With external interference of the ultra

sound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.

When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

If cargo protrudes. Under certain weather conditions such as

high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With moving objects. With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo. With objects with corners and sharp edges. With objects with a fine surface structure

such as fences. For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, for instance

curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

Seite 169

Driving comfort CONTROLS

169Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

False warnings The system may issue a warning under the fol lowing conditions even though there is no ob stacle within the detection range: In heavy rain. When sensors are very dirty or covered with

ice. When sensors are covered in snow. On rough road surfaces. On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, for instance in underground garages.

In automatic vehicle washes. Due to heavy exhaust. Due to other ultrasound sources, for in

stance sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detec tion, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switch ing on/off.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed in the in strument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera Concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis play.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter vene where appropriate.

Overview

If the vehicle is equipped accordingly: button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Seite 170

CONTROLS Driving comfort

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically The system is switched on automatically if se lector lever position R is engaged when the en gine is running.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on, if needed.

If the vehicle is equipped accordingly: switching on/off manually

Press park assistance button.

On: the LED lights up. Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.

Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID) With PDC Park Distance Control activated:

"Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement The rearview camera is switched on. The tailgate is fully closed. Keep the recording range of the camera

clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and trailers that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunc tions.

Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac tive at the same time. Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines" Lanes and turning radius are indicated.

Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, ob stacles are highlighted.

Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im age of the rearview camera. Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Seite 171

Driving comfort CONTROLS

171Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Pathway lines depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera. Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road. Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain an gle.

Obstacle marking

If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis tance Control.

Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra

dius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line.

Display settings

Brightness With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting

is reached and press the Controller.

Seite 172

CONTROLS Driving comfort

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

System limits

Detection of objects Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system. If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, certain assistance functions also take into account data from PDC Park Distance Control. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con trol chapter. The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

Parking assistant Concept

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

General information Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps: Switching on and activating. Parking space search. Parking. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best possi ble parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure. System status and instructions on required ac tions are displayed on the Control Display. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

Safety information WARNING The system does not relieve from per

sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can not independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

NOTE The parking assistant can steer the vehi

cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis tance Control applies in addition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Seite 173

Driving comfort CONTROLS

173Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel housing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasound sensors Ensure full functionality: Do not cover sensors, for instance with

stickers. Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.

For measuring parking spaces Maximum speed while driving forward ap

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. Maximum distance to row of parked vehi

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space Gaps behind an object that has a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m. Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Min. length of gap between two objects:

your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.

Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking Doors and tailgate are closed. The parking brake is released.

When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button Press park assistance button. The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gear Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Indicator on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and system status

Seite 174

CONTROLS Driving comfort

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking assistant is activated and the parking space search is active.

Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are high lighted.

The parking procedure is ac tive. Steering control has been taken over by system.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is de activated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant, refer to page 174. Acti vate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated. 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed

of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the display, refer to page 174.

3. Follow the instructions on the display. The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is indi cated on the display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Interrupting manually The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time: Press park assistance button.

"Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: If the driver grasps the steering wheel or

takes over steering. If a gear is selected that does not match the

instruction on the display. If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h. Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road

surfaces. If a maximum number of parking attempts

or the time taken for parking is exceeded. If the PDC Park Distance Control displays

clearances that are too small. When switching into other functions of the

radio. A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming An interrupted parking procedure can be con tinued, if needed. Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 174, and follow the instructions on the display.

Switching off The system can be switched off as follows:

Seite 175

Driving comfort CONTROLS

175Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Press park assistance button.

Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information WARNING The system can react not at all, too late,

incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively inter vene, if needed.

No parking assistance The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations: In tight curves.

Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads. On slippery ground. With accumulations of leaves/snow in the

parking space. With a mounted emergency wheel. With ditches or edges, for instance an edge

of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances: For small children and animals. For persons with certain clothing, for in

stance coats. With external interference of the ultra

sound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.

When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

If cargo protrudes. Under certain weather conditions such as

high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

With thin or wedge-shaped objects. With moving objects. With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo. With objects with corners and sharp edges. With objects with a fine surface structure

such as fences. For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, for instance

curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Tire size The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 176

CONTROLS Driving comfort

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Climate control Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Interior air quality The air quality inside the vehicle is improved by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter, and a climate-control system for regulating tempera ture, air flow, and recirculated-air mode. In addition there are other functions which de pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic climate control, and parked-car ventilation.

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings 2 Air flow 3 Temperature 4 Seat heating, right76

5 Air conditioning 6 Recirculated-air mode 7 Rear window defroster 8 Windshield defroster

Seite 177

Climate control CONTROLS

177Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

9 Seat heating, left76

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on Set any air flow.

Switching off Turn the wheel for air flow all the way to the left.

Temperature

Concept The system heats or cools, depending on the set temperature.

Settings Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the tempera ture setting, warmed again. The car's interior can be cooled via the A/C but ton with the engine running and/or with drive- ready state activated.

Switching on/off Press button.

The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The air conditioner produces condensation wa ter, refer to page 208, that will exit from below the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Operation Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LED off: outside air flows in continuously. LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply

of outside air into the vehicle is perma nently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated- air mode switches off automatically after a cer tain amount of time, depending on the external temperature. With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the fogging of the windows increases. If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated- air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Seite 178

CONTROLS Climate control

178 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Operation Turn the ring to set the desired air flow. The higher the air flow, the more effective the heating or cooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be re duced automatically to save battery power.

Controlling the air distribution manually

Concept The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation Turn the wheel to select the de sired program or the desired in termediate setting.

Windows. Upper body region. Floor area. Windows, upper body region, and floor

area.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation Make the following settings to defrost the win dows and remove condensation:

Direct the air distribution onto the win dows.

Increasing the air flow. Increase the temperature. Switch on the air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster Press button. The LED lights up. The front window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster Press button. The LED lights up. The rear window defroster switches off

automatically after a certain period of time. For permanent activation, press the button for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the button again. The rear window defroster can only be acti vated continuously at an external temperature below approx. 41 /5 .

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out put is reduced.

Microfilter In external and recirculated-air mode the mi crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte nance, refer to page 255.

Seite 179

Climate control CONTROLS

179Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left 2 Display 3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 4 AUTO program 5 Air distribution, manual 6 Display 7 Temperature, right 8 Seat heating, right76

9 Maximum cooling 10 Air conditioning 11 Recirculated-air mode 12 Rear window defroster 13 Windshield defroster 14 Defrosting windows and removing conden

sation 15 Seat heating, left76

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on Set any air flow.

Switching off Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

Concept The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary

Seite 180

CONTROLS Climate control

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Settings Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between different tem perature settings. The automatic climate con trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the tempera ture setting, warmed again. The car's interior can be cooled via the A/C but ton with the engine running and/or with drive- ready state activated.

Switching on/off Press button. The LED is illuminated with air condi

tioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The air conditioning is switched on automati cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, con densation water, refer to page 208, develops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor mal.

Maximum cooling

Concept The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

General information The function is available with external tempera tures beyond approx. 32 /0 and with the engine running. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re gion. The vents need to be open for this. The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow active.

Switching on/off Press button. The LED is illuminated with the system

switched on.

The system is set to the lowest temperature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode.

AUTO program

Concept Air flow, air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically.

Switching on/off Press button. The LED is illuminated with the AUTO

program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is di rected to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the floor area. The following features are switched on auto matically with the AUTO program: The air conditioning, refer to page 181. To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity With the AUTO program activated, the auto matic intensity control can be changed.

Seite 181

Climate control CONTROLS

181Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Turn the ring to set the desired intensity from soft to intensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the position of the illuminated LED segment.

Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode

Concept The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air. The outside air supply is shut off and the inte rior air is recirculated.

General information If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol lutants in the outside air and controls the shut- off automatically. If the system is deactivated, outside air contin uously flows into the car's interior. With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the fogging of the windows increases. You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu tants in the immediate environment by tempo rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Switching on/off Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con

trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out side air and shuts off automatically.

Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per manently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated- air mode switches off automatically after a cer tain amount of time, depending on the external temperature. If windows are fogged over, switch off the recir culating mode and press the AUTO button. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

General information To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO program first.

Operation Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments. The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Controlling the air distribution manually

Concept The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation Press button repeatedly to select a program:

Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

Upper body region and floor area.

Seite 182

CONTROLS Climate control

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Floor area. Windows and floor area. Windows. Windows and upper body region. Upper body region.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Concept Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win dows.

Switching on/off Press button. The LED is illuminated with the system

switched on. Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side win dows.

The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow active. If there is window condensation, switch on the air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster Press button. The LED lights up. The front window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster Press button. The LED lights up. The rear window defroster switches off

automatically after a certain period of time. For permanent activation, press the button for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the button again.

The rear window defroster can only be acti vated continuously at an external temperature below approx. 41 /5 .

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out put is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter In external and recirculated-air mode the mi crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte nance, refer to page 255.

Ventilation Setting The air flow directions can be individually ad justed: Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the per son. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature.

Indirect ventilation: If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's interior.

Front ventilation

Turn knob for continuous opening and clos ing of the vents.

Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrows.

Seite 183

Climate control CONTROLS

183Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Ventilation in the rear

Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 1.

Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos ing of the vents, arrow 2.

Stationary climate con trol Concept Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's interior prior to departure to a comforta ble temperature. The system automatically cools, vents, and heats depending on the ambient and set tem perature. Snow and ice may be removed more easily.

General information The stationary climate control can be switched on and off directly or via a preset departure time: Direct operation, refer to page 184. Preselected departure times, refer to

page 185. The air automatically exits through the vents to the windshield, the side windows, the upper body region and into the floor area. The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time. If stationary climate control is used during the charging process, less air conditioning capacity

will be required while driving. This optimizes the range.

Functional requirements Motor switched off and/or drive-ready state

deactivated. High-voltage battery sufficiently charged or

charging cable connected. If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis charged, it can take some time after con necting the charging cable, until the sta tionary climate control will be functional.

Direct operation or departure time prese lected: depends on internal, external, and set desired temperature. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

The ensure the starting capability of the ve hicle, the stationary climate control may be automatically switched off, for instance af ter repeated switching on: switch the drive- ready state on and off and the system is available again.

The vents are open to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

Concept The system can be switched on or off directly. The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID): The system can be switched on or off via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Activate comfort climate" 5. "Activate now"

Seite 184

CONTROLS Climate control

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Climate control at departure time

Concept Different departure times can be adjusted to ensure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of departure. The activation time is automatically determined based on the temperature. The system promptly switches on before the selected departure time. The departure time is preselected in two steps: Set departure times. Activate departure times.

Setting the departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Activate comfort climate" 5. "Plan comfort climate" 6. Set the desired departure time, refer to

page 224.

Activating the departure time If a departure time is to influence the switching on of the stationary climate control, the respec tive departure time must be activated first. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings" 3. If necessary, "Climate functions" 4. "Activate comfort climate" 5. "Plan comfort climate" 6. "Precondition for departure"

Activate the desired departure time. The symbol on the automatic climate con

trol lights up when the departure time is acti vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con trol flashes when the stationary climate control has been switched on.

Seite 185

Climate control CONTROLS

185Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Interior equipment Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Integrated Universal Re mote Control Concept The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems, such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems. The integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To op erate the remote control, the buttons on the in terior mirror must be programmed with the de sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

Safety information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat

ing remote-controlled systems, such as the ga rage door, using the integrated Universal Re mote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear

during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held trans mitter.

Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag ing or in the owner's manual of the sys tem to be controlled, the system is gen

erally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control. If you have any questions, please contact: A dealers service center or another quali

fied service center or repair shop. www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Overview

1 LED 2 Programmable keys 3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for ap

Seite 186

CONTROLS Interior equipment

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

proximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior mirror.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be program med on the interior mirror. The LED on the interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the inte rior mirror has been programmed. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior mirror and the hand-held trans mitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be nec essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeat edly press and release the hand-held trans mitter button for 2 seconds.

6. To program other functions on other but tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the interior mirror buttons.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the sys tem to be controlled features a rolling code radio system. Read the system's owner's manual, or press the programmed button on the interior mirror lon ger. If the LED on the interior mirror starts

flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features a rolling code radio system. Flashing and continuous illumina tion of the LED will repeat for approximately 20 seconds. For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated Universal Remote Control and the system also have to be synchronized. Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person. Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the interior mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish syn chronization. Once synchronization is com plete, the programmed function will be car ried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to

be programmed. 3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts

flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans mitter for the system to be controlled ap prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior mirror. The re quired distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

Seite 187

Interior equipment CONTROLS

187Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held trans mitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior mirror. If the LED does not flash faster after at most 60 seconds, change the distance and re peat the programming starting with step 4. Several more attempts at different distan ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 sec onds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeat edly press and release the hand-held trans mitter button for 2 seconds.

Operation WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat

ing remote-controlled systems, such as the ga rage door, using the integrated Universal Re mote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held trans mitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior mir ror while the engine is running or when the ig nition is started. To do this, hold down the but ton within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in terior mirror simultaneously for approximately

20 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes rapidly. All stored functions will be de leted. The functions cannot be deleted individ ually.

Digital compass Overview

1 Control button 2 Mirror display

Mirror display The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight.

Operating concept Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed: Pressed briefly: turns display on/off. 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting. 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration. 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering

setting. 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Seite 188

CONTROLS Interior equipment

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Setting the compass zones Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi cle so that the compass operates correctly; re fer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure 1. Press and hold the control button for ap

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the con trol button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corre sponds with your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The com pass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following: The wrong compass point is displayed.

The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel.

Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic

objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compass zone. 3. Press and hold the control button for ap

prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Seite 189

Interior equipment CONTROLS

189Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Left/right-hand steering The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but ton again to switch between English "E" and German "O". Settings are stored automatically after approxi mately 10 seconds.

Sun visor Glare shield To provide protection against glare, fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash tray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information WARNING Contact with the hot heating element or

the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the respective objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.

NOTE If metal objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam age to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be re moved as soon as it pops back out.

Sockets Concept The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when the ignition or drive- ready state is switched on.

General information The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using non-com patible connectors.

Seite 190

CONTROLS Interior equipment

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety information WARNING Devices and cables in the unfolding area

of the airbags, such as portable navigation de vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board net work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect bat tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compart ment.

NOTE If metal objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam age to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

In the front center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the rear center console

Remove the cover.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.

USB interface/AUX-IN port Concept Mobile devices with USB port can be connected to the USB interface. A mobile audio device, for instance a MP3 player, can be connected using the AUX-IN port.

General information Follow the information regarding the connec tion of mobile devices to the USB interface in the section on USB connections, refer to page 38.

Seite 191

Interior equipment CONTROLS

191Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

In the center console

The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo cated at the front in the center console.

Under the center armrest

The USB interface is located under the center armrest.

Seite 192

CONTROLS Interior equipment

192 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Storage compartments Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information WARNING Loose objects or devices with a cable

connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an ac cident or during braking and evasive maneu vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob jects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTE Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can

damage the dashboard. There is a risk of dam age to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview The following storage compartments are avail able in the car's interior: Glove compartment on the front passenger

side. Storage compartment under the driver's

seat. Compartments in the doors.

Storage compartment in the center arm rest.

Storage compartment in front of the cup holders.

Clothes hooks Storage compartments in the cargo area. Storage tray in the center console. Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

Glove compartment Safety information

WARNING Folded open, the glove compartment

protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and eva sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment immediately after using it.

Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Seite 193

Storage compartments CONTROLS

193Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Closing Fold up the cover.

Driver's seat There is a storage compartment under the driv er's seat.

Compartments in the doors

WARNING Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or

glasses, can break in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

Center armrest General information The center armrest contains a storage compart ment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center armrest upward, arrow 2.

Set the incline The center armrest can be adjusted in several tilt settings.

Cup holders Safety information

WARNING Unsuitable containers in the cup holder

and hot beverages can damage the cup holder and increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam age to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages. Do not force objects into the cup holder.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

General information The cup holder is located in the center armrest.

Seite 194

CONTROLS Storage compartments

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. To open: press the button. To close: push both covers back in, one after the other.

Safety information NOTE With an open cup holder, the center arm

rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property. Press back the covers be fore the center armrest is folded up.

Clothes hooks General information The clothes hooks are located above the rear doors.

Safety information WARNING Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can

obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of an accident. When suspending clothing arti cles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

WARNING Improper use of the clothes hooks can

lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only

hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

Seite 195

Storage compartments CONTROLS

195Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Cargo area Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Loading Safety information

WARNING High gross weight can overheat the tires,

damage them internally and cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing lane stability, lengthening the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the permit ted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.

WARNING Loose objects or devices with a cable

connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an ac cident or during braking and evasive maneu vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob jects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

WARNING Improperly stowed objects can shift and

be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTE Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam

age. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca pacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine

Seite 196

CONTROLS Cargo area

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo. Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi

ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.

Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo.

Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet straps or draw straps.

Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Cargo cover General information When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.

Safety information WARNING Loose objects or devices with a cable

connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an ac cident or during braking and evasive maneu vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob jects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Removing For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

Seite 197

Cargo area CONTROLS

197Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.

Installing 1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally

into the two side brackets until it audibly engages.

2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

Storage compartments in the cargo area Storage compartment on the side A storage compartment is located on the left side.

Multi-function hook WARNING Improper use of the multi-function hooks

can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, such as shopping bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appropriately se cured.

The cargo area contains two multi-function hooks.

Storage space under cargo floor panel

NOTE The storage space under the cargo floor

panel is only suitable for soft objects. Hard ob jects may result in damage to the vehicle elec trical system in the event of an accident. There is a risk of damage to property. Only stow soft objects under the cargo floor panel.

Enlarging the cargo area Concept The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrests or by moving the rear seat backrest into the cargo position.

General information The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 402040. The side rear seat backrests and the center section can be folded down separately. The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear.

Seite 198

CONTROLS Cargo area

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety information WARNING Danger of jamming with folding down the

backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

WARNING If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse

cured cargo can be thrown into the car's inte rior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.

WARNING Unexpected movements of the backrest

while driving may occur due to unintentional unlocking of the rear backrests by the straps. There is a risk of injury. Do not fasten any ob jects to the straps for unlocking the rear back rests.

WARNING The stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re straints or remove them.

WARNING Body parts can be jammed when moving

the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear

Pull the strap forward. The rear seat backrest folds forward.

Cargo position

Concept The rear seat backrests can be separately moved through several tilt stages into an up right loading position.

Settings 1. Pull the strap.

2. Set the loading position of the rear seat backrest as required.

3. Latch the rear seat backrest.

Seite 199

Cargo area CONTROLS

199Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Fold back the backrest 1. Pull the strap.

2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward.

Variable cargo area floor Concept With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to trans port requirements.

General information Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 196.

Removing the cargo floor panel 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel

upward.

2. Grasp the cargo floor panel at the rear and fold it upward.

3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from the brackets.

Inserting the cargo floor panel 1. Push the cargo area floor into the supports

at a shallow angle. The cargo area floor must engage noticeably.

2. Fold the cargo area floor over downward.

MINI Picnic Bench Concept The MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfortable seating surface on the loading lip of the vehicle.

General information Only use the MINI Picnic Bench while the vehi cle is parked and with the tailgate open. When the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use, fold it to gether to prevent soiling and damage. In vehicles with a no-touch opening and closing tailgate: If the remote control is in the sensor area, the tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot movement. The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi cle.

Seite 200

CONTROLS Cargo area

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety information WARNING Body parts can be jammed when operat

ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the tailgate is clear during opening and closing.

Overview The MINI Picnic Bench is located on the under side of the cargo area floor.

Mounting 1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel

upward.

2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on the front part of the cargo floor panel and attach it to the rear part of the cargo floor panel using the four snaps.

3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench toward the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench is fastened with magnets.

4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor downward.

To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, proceed in reverse order.

Folding down 1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.

2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the middle and pull it back and up against the force of the magnets.

3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor downward and place the MINI Picnic Bench

Seite 201

Cargo area CONTROLS

201Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

over the loading lip of the cargo area. Place a protective cloth over the bumper.

Folding up Fold rear part of the cargo floor panel upward. The MINI Picnic Bench swings against the un derside of the cargo area floor and is fastened there with magnets.

Seite 202

CONTROLS Cargo area

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Seite 203

Cargo area CONTROLS

203Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

DRIVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Things to remember when driving Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to begin working together smoothly. The following instructions will help you to ach ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

Safety information WARNING Due to new parts and components, safety

and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con servatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob serve the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be ob served if any of the components above-men tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes Closing the tailgate

Safety information WARNING An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi

cle and can endanger occupants and other traf fic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive ma neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk

Seite 206

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

of damage to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.

Driving with the tailgate open If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: Close all windows and the glass sunroof. Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust gas system WARNING During driving operation, high tempera

tures can occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas system. If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex haust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not remove the heat shields in stalled and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driv ing operation, idle or during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

WARNING Vehicle electronics and mobile phones

can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam age to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mu tual interference and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.

Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through water

General information When driving through water, follow the follow ing: Drive through calm water only. Drive through water only if it is not deeper

than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm. Drive through water no faster than walking

speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information NOTE When driving too quickly through too

deep water, water can enter into the engine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. When driving through water, do not ex ceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through wa ter.

Braking safely

General information The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Perform an emergency stop in situations that require such. Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef fort. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Seite 207

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

207Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Objects in the area around the pedals WARNING Objects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and can not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re moved, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every few miles. Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills

General information Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Other wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Safety information WARNING Light but consistent brake pressure can

lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk

of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system.

WARNING In idle state, in the GREEN Mode driving

program, or with drive-ready state switched off, safety-relevant functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking force boost, and steer ing assistance, are restricted or not available at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle state, in the GREEN Mode driving program, or with drive-ready state switched off.

Brake disc corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol lowing circumstances: Low mileage. Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all. Infrequent use of the brakes. Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning

agents. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, con densation water develops and collects under neath the vehicle.

Ground clearance NOTE If ground clearance is insufficient, there

might be contact with the front or rear spoiler, for instance when driving over curbs or enter ing into underground vehicle parking garages. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance availa ble.

Seite 208

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Roof-mounted luggage rack General information Installation only possible with roof rack. Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Loading Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

Be sure that adequate clearance is main tained for tilting and opening the glass sun roof.

Distribute the roof load uniformly. The roof load should not extend past the

loading area. Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom. Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance

using ratchet straps. Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate. Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler

ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Driving on poor roads Concept Because of its greater ground clearance, the vehicle can be driven on a variety of road types and qualities.

Safety information NOTE Objects in unpaved areas, for instance

stones or branches, can damage the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on unpaved terrain.

When driving on poor roads For your own safety, for the safety of passen gers and of the vehicle, heed the following points: Become familiar with the vehicle before

starting a trip; do not take risks while driv ing.

Adjust the speed to the road surface condi tions. The steeper and more uneven the road surface, the slower the speed.

When driving on steep uphill or downhill grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near the MAX mark.

Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in contact with the ground. The ground clear ance may vary depending on the vehicle load.

When wheels continue to spin, depress the accelerator so that driving stability control systems can distribute the driving force to the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Control if available.

After a trip on poor roads Note the following to maintain driving safety: Clear heavy soiling from the body.

Seite 209

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

209Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Keep the wheels and tires free of mud, snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam age.

Driving on racetracks Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports competition.

Seite 210

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Saving fuel Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis sion values. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv ing style and regular maintenance can influ ence fuel consumption and environmental im pact.

Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

Tires General information Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without de lay Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.

Seite 211

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

211Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi cle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con sumption and reduces wear.

Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For going downhill take your foot off the accel erator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Switch off these functions if they are not needed.

Have maintenance car ried out Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI recommends that maintenance work be performed by a MINI service center. Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 255.

Using the hybrid system efficiently Concept The vehicle's hybrid system runs automatically. Through foresighted driving, the hybrid proper ties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel consumption and energy recovery are optimized.

Optimizing energy recovery

Types of energy recovery Energy recovery is used to charge the high- voltage battery. Energy recovery is important for the supply of electrical components and thus a prerequisite for fuel efficiency. Energy recovery appears in three stages during coast ing and braking: Low energy recovery: while coasting to a

halt without stepping on the brake. Average energy recovery: while decelerat

ing slightly by gently pressing the brake pedal.

Maximum energy recovery: when pressing the brake pedal somewhat more firmly pro vided that the pointer remains in the mid dle area of the CHARGE indicator in the in strument cluster, refer to page 111.

Optimum energy recovery Foresighted driving and decelerating helps with optimizing energy recovery.

Seite 212

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

As soon as the display shows the maximum en ergy recovery, only press the brake pedal harder if required by the situation.

Exemplary traffic situations for fuel efficiency In many driving situations, the hybrid system allows for a particularly efficient energy man agement. Stop-and-go traffic:

The combustion engine is switched on or over automatically by the hybrid system.

Driving with constant speed: The electric motor relieves the combustion engine periodically by also being switched on.

Optimizing fuel consumption

Charging the vehicle regularly Charge the vehicle regularly and completely us ing a suitable charging device. This will reduce fuel consumption due to the use of electrical energy. Longer idle periods, refer to page 275, can re duce the charge state of the high-voltage bat tery.

Avoiding the use of the combustion engine Follow the following information to avoid using the combustion engine: Set the characteristics of the hybrid system

to MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 93. Follow the indicators in the instrument clus

ter regarding electric driving, refer to page 111.

Using the navigation system regularly Use the navigation system also for familiar and regularly traveled routes. When the navigation system destination guidance is active, the hy brid system uses the existing navigation data.

The upcoming course of the road is analyzed. Hybrid operation adapts to the specific route sections. The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for example.

GREEN Mode Concept GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en gine control and comfort features, for instance the climate control output, are adjusted. Under certain conditions the engine is auto matically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position and the engine is switched off. The D selector lever position re mains engaged. In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con sumption driving style.

Activating GREEN Mode Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument clus ter.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch 1. Activating GREEN Mode. 2. "Configure GREEN" 3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display (CID): 1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle settings"

Seite 213

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

213Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

3. If necessary, "Driving mode" 4. "Configure GREEN" 5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions The following functions can be activated/deac tivated: "GREEN speed warning": "GREEN climate control" Settings are stored for the driver profile cur rently used.

GREEN Limit Activate the GREEN Limit:

"GREEN speed warning": A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit: "Tip at:" Select the desired speed.

GREEN climate control Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. By making a slight change to the set tempera ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior fuel consumption can be economized. The power output to the seat heater and exte rior mirror is reduced.

GREEN potential savings Shows potential savings with the current set tings in percentages.

Seite 214

DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Seite 215

Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS

215Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

MOVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Charging the vehicle Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept The vehicle can be charged using various charging cables at charging stations or house hold sockets. Control and monitoring of the charging process are handled completely auto matically. The charge current strength can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information High-voltage battery The high-voltage battery is used as an energy accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be charged by energy recovery during the trip or via the power grid. In order to operate the high-voltage battery optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and completely on a compatible charger. When charging via the power grid, you can chose between the following variants. Level 1 charging via a household socket. Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging sta

tion.

Level 1 charging is possible via a household socket with a voltage of 120 volts. For optimal use of the energy from the power mains, charging at a charging station, for in stance BMW Wallbox, is recommended.

Charge current

General information The charge current strength is indicated in am peres. The vehicle cannot automatically detect the maximum permissible charge current strength of the power grid during charging via a house hold socket or charging station.

Level 1 charging Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own household socket, as well as when charging at external electrical power sockets in Level 1, the allowed charge current strength must be deter mined, for instance by a qualified electrician. The charge current strength for Level 1 charg ing, refer to page 223, can be adjusted in the vehicle in three levels. At delivery, the charge current for Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level. Depending on the country-specific version, one of several ampere ratings is printed on the Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rating is the limit which must be adhered to for the ve hicle if the charge current is set to the highest level. Depending on the charging cable, the charge current strength may vary when lower levels are set.

Seite 218

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Overview

Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting

"Max." "Reduced" "Low"

8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A

10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A

12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A

15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A

Depending on the charge current setting, the charging duration changes.

Maintaining charge state Should it be necessary, for instance to conserve the electric range for a later point in time on the trip, the current charge state of the high- voltage battery can be maintained or increased with SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 94.

Safety information WARNING Improper working with electrical current

can lead to an electric shock due to high vol tages or high currents. There is a risk of fire or danger to life. Observe the general safety regu lations when working with electrical current.

WARNING A faulty and incorrectly designed charg

ing device at the charging location can cause damage to the vehicle and overload the power mains at the charging location. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that, prior to your first use of a charging loca tion, you have the compatibility of the follow ing components confirmed: Charging cable. Charging station. Household socket and connected circuits.

WARNING Damaged or worn charging devices, for

instance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk of fire. Only use charging devices in proper state.

WARNING If a sufficient safety distance from easily

flammable materials is not maintained, simul taneous charging and filling with fuel can cause a risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and charge it simultaneously.

WARNING Contact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. High voltage is applied at the charging connection. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that work on the charging connection, for in stance cleaning, be performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

Charging cable General information Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging cable or the permanently installed charging ca ble of a charging station to charge the vehicle.

Seite 219

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

219Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Different charging cables can be required de pending on the country.

Safety information WARNING Non-compatible charging cables or un

suitable charging stations can heat up and cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. Use charging cables or charging stations for charging that are suitable for the respective vehicle type. A dealer's service center will be glad to provide information about suitable charging cables.

WARNING Improper use of the charging cable can

prevent charging and lead to damage, for in stance cable fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not extend it using cables or adapters.

WARNING Damaged charging cables can heat up or

lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Use undamaged charging ca bles only.

Level 1 charging cable The vehicle is supplied with a Level 1 charging cable. With the Level 1 charging cable, it is permissible to perform charging from grounded household sockets. At the power connection of a house hold socket, charging is done with alternating current. When a Level 1 charging cable is used, this may produce efficiency values other than indicated on the energy label.

Level 2 charging cable The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible to quickly recharge at sockets of designated Level 2 charging stations using a special plug. Charging is performed with alternating current

at designated Level 2 charging stations. The charging process can be completed faster than at household sockets. A charging current strength of up to maxi mum 16 A is possible. If necessary, the charging cable is attached to the charging station.

Storage

The Level 1 charging cable is located in a bag in the cargo area.

Store charging cable again in the bag after use. Attach the bag to the designated eyelet. If required, store the charging cable with the in stalled plug cover to prevent moisture in the charging cable plug.

Connecting

Charging socket flap

The charging socket flap is located on the left side of the vehicle. Always keep charging socket clean and unob structed.

Seite 220

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Keep the charging socket flap closed when the charging socket is not used.

Connecting the charging cable To connect, engage selector lever position P, deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.

1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.

2. Remove cover of the charging cable plug, if needed.

3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.

4. Insert the charging cable plug correspond ing to the charging socket, and push it in until it engages.

Removing When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable. If necessary, clean the area between charging socket flap and charging socket, for instance from snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is locked. Charging cable is unlocked.

2. Press the release button on the handle, ar row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the gripping areas.

Charging process is interrupted.

3. Remove the charging cable from the charg ing socket, arrow 2.

4. Put the charging socket lid back on. 5. Close the charging socket flap. 6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if

needed. 7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the

household socket or Level 2 charging cable from the port on the charging station as needed.

8. Stow the charging cable. At a charging station, insert the perma nently installed charging cable in the place provided for it.

Manually unlocking the charging cable The charging cable is locked when the vehicle is locked and during the charging process. In case of an electrical malfunction, the charg ing cable can be manually unlocked.

1. Open the hood. 2. Pull the knob.

Seite 221

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

221Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Charging cable is manually unlocked.

3. Removing the charging cable, refer to page 221.

Charging process Safety information

WARNING Improper use of the power mains con

nection can lead to damage, for instance cable fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Use the charging cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not extend it using cables or adapters.

WARNING If the charge current strength is adjusted

incorrectly, the power mains of the household socket can be overloaded and overheat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current strength to the power mains prior to charging on household sockets. With unknown power networks, set on the lowest level.

Starting the charging process 1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the

parking brake, if needed. 2. Planning the charging process, refer to

page 223. 3. Switch off drive-ready state. 4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the

household socket or Level 2 charging cable to the port on the charging station.

5. Open charging socket flap. 6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle, refer

to page 220. 7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked. At high temperatures, the high-voltage battery is initially cooled. There may be a delay before charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is discharged, cooling of the high-voltage battery may not be possible. The charging process can not be started. The charging process may take longer under extremely low or high temperatures.

Display of the charging status

Indicator light at the charging socket

An indicator light is located on the charging socket.

Charging status

Light Charging status

White Charging cable can be con nected or removed.

Flashes or ange

Charging process is being pre pared.

Yellow The charging process starts at the set time.

Flashes yel low

Charging process is active.

Seite 222

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Light Charging status

Flashes red Fault in the charging process.

Green Charging process is completed.

When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light goes out after some time. When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellow indi cator light flashes continuously. The other indi cator lights go out after some time.

Press the button of the remote control to check the charging status. The charging status is indicated on the indicator light. In some cases the vehicle is locked. Additional messages about the charging status, for instance the probable end of charging or the planned departure time, can be shown in the instrument cluster or on the Control Dis play.

Planning the charging process

General information The charging process can be adapted to con straints, for instance the cost of electricity. The vehicle can control the charging process in such a way that the charging process is completed at the departure time. A departure time must be set for this purpose, refer to page 224. The following settings are available: Immediate charging. Set time window for favorable charging. Set the charge current for charging via a

Level 1 charging cable. If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information Display (CID). Settings for stationary climate control and charging process are also accepted for planned departure times.

Immediate charging The charging process starts as soon as the charging cable is connected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Plan charging/climate control" 3. "Charge immediately"

Setting time window for favorable charging When a departure time is set, a time window for charging with a favorable electricity rate can be set via the Central Information Display (CID). Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Plan charging/climate control" 3. "Charge for departure time" 4. "Set low cost time slot" 5. Set rate begin. 6. Set rate end. The vehicle can also start the charging process before the selected time window begins or end it after the selected time window finishes. The starting point of the charging process is ad justed so the vehicle can be fully charged and, if applicable, its climate controlled right up to the departure time.

Setting the charge current for charging via a Level 1 charging cable Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle must be charged with a different charging cur rent strength, refer to page 218. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Plan charging/climate control" 3. "Charging rate settings" Settings are stored. When you change charging locations you also might need to change the setting for charging. Set the charge current strength at other house hold sockets to the lowest level.

Seite 223

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

223Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Stopping the charging process The charging process can be stopped at any time by removing the charging cable and con tinued at a later time by connecting the charg ing cable. This enables, for instance the use of other loads on the power connection or pre vents simultaneous high power from multiple loads. Removing the charging cable, refer to page 221.

Continuing the charging process If the charging process is interrupted, for in stance through a temporary power failure, the charging process is automatically continued af ter the interruption.

Terminating the charging process 1. Remove the charging cable from the vehi

cle, refer to page 221. 2. Stow the charging cable as required. 3. Close the charging socket flap. 4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Displays in the instru ment cluster The charge state indicator light, refer to page 122, shows the charge state of the high- voltage battery in the instrument cluster, if the ignition or drive-ready state is switched on. If all bars are filled, the high-voltage battery is fully charged. Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage sys tem is still under high voltage. Information regarding the charging process are shown on the charging screen.

Display Meaning

Display red, without ring: charging process is being prepared. Display green, ring flashing green: charging process is active. Display green, with ring: charging process is complete or inactive. Display red, with ring: fault in the charging process.

End of charging time or set departure time.

Departure time set.

Climate control activated at departure time.

Flashing: ventilation active.

Flashing: heating active.

Flashing: cooling active.

Departure time Concept For optimum range and climate control, the de parture time can be set before parking the ve hicle.

General information With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre- heated or pre-cooled during the charging proc ess if climate control is set. Climate control out put is reduced during the trip. This increases the range during electric driving.

Seite 224

MOBILITY Charging the vehicle

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The following settings are possible at departure time: Climate control at departure time. Planning of up to two regular departure

times. If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can be made via the Central Information Display (CID). Settings for climate control and charging process are also applied for scheduled depar ture times.

Climate control at departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Plan charging/climate control" 3. "Precondition for departure"

Setting the departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Plan charging/climate control" 3. "Set departure time" 4. Set the desired time. Up to two departure times can be set.

Activating the departure time Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Plan charging/climate control" 3. "Set departure time"

Set departure times are displayed. 4. For example activate "Departure time 1". Up to two departure times can be activated. The set departure time will be deactivated, if the departure time was ignored three times in a row.

Climate control The following settings for climate control of the vehicle are possible: Activate stationary climate control immedi

ately, refer to page 184. With stationary climate control activated and no charging cable connected, the range is reduced.

Planned climate control at the set depar ture time, refer to page 185. If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the high-voltage battery may not be fully charged at departure time.

Discharged high-voltage and vehicle battery General information In addition to the high-voltage battery, the ve hicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re quired for operation of the onboard electronics. If the high-voltage battery is discharged and the combustion engine is started, air condition ing may be limited. With a discharged vehicle battery, no operation of the vehicle is possible.

Starting the vehicle If the vehicle battery is discharged, the com bustion engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables, see Jump-starting, refer to page 267.

Seite 225

Charging the vehicle MOBILITY

225Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Refueling Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to page 229, prior to refueling. To also ensure all engine functions under un favorable conditions, for instance steep vehicle inclinations, at least 3 US gal/10 liters fuel should be refueled.

Safety information NOTE With a driving range of less than

30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

WARNING If a sufficient safety distance from easily

flammable materials is not maintained, simul taneous charging and filling with fuel can cause a risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and charge it simultaneously.

Tank vent Concept The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel tank. The fuel tank is designed for special require ments that arise from hybrid operation of the vehicle, i.e., alternating drive with combustion engine or electric motor.

General information In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build up due to gasoline vapors which are dissipated be fore the fuel cap is opened.

Overview The switch is located in the storage compart ment of the driver's door.

Tank venting 1. Switch off drive-ready state.

2. Pull the switch to start the pressure equalization. The status of the tank venting is displayed in the instrument cluster. In rare cases, the tank venting can last several minutes. If the tank venting has been completed, a message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The fuel filler flap is released for opening.

3. Open the fuel filler flap. If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap after tank venting, pull the switch again. If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler flap even after the switch has been pulled, unlock the fuel filler flap manually, refer to page 227.

Seite 226

MOBILITY Refueling

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Fuel cap Opening Before opening, vent the tank, refer to page 226. 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing WARNING The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be

jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay attention that the re taining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction. The release is located in the cargo area.

1. Remove the cover. 2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump

symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

3. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap. Fuel filler flap is opened.

Follow the following when refueling General information When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: Premature switching off. Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

Seite 227

Refueling MOBILITY

227Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta tion.

Safety informationSafety information WARNING If a sufficient safety distance from easily

flammable materials is not maintained, simul taneous charging and filling with fuel can cause a risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not fill the vehicle with fuel and charge it simultaneously.

NOTE Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling

of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environ ment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.

Seite 228

MOBILITY Refueling

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Fuel Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Fuel recommendation General information Depending on the region, many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter, for instance helps make a cold start eas ier.

Gasoline

General information For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con taining metal must not be used. Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel ing. Ethanol should meet the following quality stan dards: US: ASTM 4806xx CAN: CGSB-3.511xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Safety information NOTE Do not press the Start/Stop button after

refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the catalytic converter is permanently damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gaso line engines: Leaded gasoline. Metallic additives, for instance manganese

or iron. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealers serv ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTE Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys

tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTE Fuel that does not comply with the mini

mum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality.

CAUTION The use of poor-quality fuels may result in

harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environ mental conditions such as high ambient tem perature and high altitude, may occur.

Seite 229

Fuel MOBILITY

229Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

If drivability problems are encountered, we rec ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI num ber for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled mainte nance.

Recommended fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 91. Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade MINI recommends AKI 89. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Seite 230

MOBILITY Fuel

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Wheels and tires Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Tire inflation pressure General information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres sure influence the following: The service life of the tires. Road safety. Driving comfort. Fuel consumption.

Safety information WARNING A tire with too little or no tire inflation

pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and brak ing response. There is a risk of an accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and before a long trip.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 232, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: Tire sizes of your vehicle. Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation pressure increases with the tire temperature. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla tion pressure. The displays of inflation devices may under- read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the ambient temperature. Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.: Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has

not been exceeded.

Seite 231

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

231Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine, refer to page 231, the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example.

3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from the specified value.

4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/ 160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 232, and adjust as necessary.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER SE

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/55 R 17 97 H M+S Std/RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

225/50 R 18 95 W RSC 225/50 R 18 95 H M+S RSC 225/50 R 18 95 V M+S A/S Std/RSC

2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

WARNING In order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Other wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for op timum driving comfort, note the pressure val ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 233, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 232

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER SE

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

225/55 R 17 97 H M+S Std/RSC

2.3 / 33 2.7 / 39

225/50 R 18 95 W RSC 225/50 R 18 95 H M+S RSC 225/50 R 18 95 V M+S A/S Std/RSC

2.5 / 36 2.9 / 42

Tire identification marks Tire size 205/45 R 17 84 V 205: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code 17: rim diameter in inches 84: load rating, not for ZR tires V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire load Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR on the certification label on the drivers door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicles Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.

Speed letter Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h R = 106 mph/170 km/h S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3817 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design 3817: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Manufacture date You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall. Designation Manufacture date

DOT 3817 38th week, 2017

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C

Seite 233

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

233Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Temperature A B C All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli mate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under control led conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hy droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger ve hicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A

represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re quired by law.

WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 237, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Seite 234

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indi cator.

Tire damage General information Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low- profile tires. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal functions: Unusual vibrations. Unusual tire or running noises. Unusual handling such as a strong ten

dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by the following situa tions, for instance: Driving over curbs. Road damage.

Tire inflation pressure too low. Vehicle overloading. Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information WARNING Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres

sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them re placed.

WARNING Tires can become damaged by driving

over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Changing wheels and tires Mounting and wheel balancing Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information You can ask the dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop

Seite 235

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

235Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information WARNING Wheels and tires which are not suitable

for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi cle, for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manu facturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been rec ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type.

WARNING Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will

have a negative impact on the vehicle's han dling and on the function of a variety of sys tems, such as ABS or DSC. There is a risk of an accident. To maintain good handling and vehi cle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been rec ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires WARNING Retreaded tires can have different tire

casing structures. With advanced age the serv ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of per formance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop. With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Run-flat tires If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Further information is availa ble from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 236

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Rotating wheels between axles Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further information is available from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or re pair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.

Storing tires

Air pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents. Do not leave tires in plastic bags. Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires Concept Run-flat tires permit continued driving under restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General information The wheels are composed of tires that are self- supporting to a limited degree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re main drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire.

Safety information WARNING Your vehicle handles differently with a

run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in stance, your lane stability when braking is re duced, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning system. Secure the vehicle against rolling away by

setting the parking brake. Turn the steering wheel until the front

wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Seite 237

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

237Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Mobility System Concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.

General information Follow the instructions on using the Mobi

lity System found on the compressor and sealant container.

Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec tive if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

Contact a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.

Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel.

The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM wheel electronics replaced at the next opportunity.

The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Overview

Storage The Mobility System is located in a bag on the right side trim in the cargo area.

Sealant container

Sealant container, arrow 1. Filling hose, arrow 2. Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking 2 Sealant container holder 3 Tire pressure gage 4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button 5 On/off switch 6 Compressor 7 Connector/cable for socket 8 Connection hose

Safety measures Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning system. Secure the vehicle against rolling away by

setting the parking brake.

Seite 238

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

238 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila

tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con tain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accu mulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

NOTE The compressor can overheat during ex

tended operation. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes.

Filling 1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.

3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it engages audibly.

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.

Seite 239

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

239Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

5. With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.

6. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

Checking 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire

pressure gage. To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con

tainer from the tire valve. 2. Press the red unlocking device. 3. Remove the sealant container from the

compressor. 4. Wrap and store the sealant container in

suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached 1. Pull the connector out of the power socket

inside the vehicle. 2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis

tribute the sealant in the tire. 3. Screw the connection hose of the compres

sor directly onto the tire valve stem.

4. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

5. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

Seite 240

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres sure is reached.

6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com pressor from the tire valve.

7. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com

pressor from the tire valve. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket

inside the vehicle. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to

ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Adjustment 1. Stop at a suitable location. 2. Screw the connection hose of the compres

sor directly onto the tire valve stem.

3. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar. Increase tire inflation pressure: with the

ignition switched on or the engine run ning, switch on the compressor.

Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com pressor from the tire valve.

6. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 144. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 139. Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains General information The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter mined certain wheels and tires to be suitable for operation on the vehicle. Mounting of snow

Seite 241

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

241Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

chains on these wheels and tires is not permit ted.

Safety information WARNING With the mounting of snow chains on un

suitable tires, the snow chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac cidents or risk of damage to property. Do not mount snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires General information When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed im mediately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure due to a flat tire. If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or re pair shop.

Safety information DANGER The vehicle jack is only provided for

short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are ob served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine.

DANGER Supports such as wooden blocks under

the vehicle jack may prevent it from achieving its load capacity due to its restricted height. The load capacity of the wooden blocks may be ex ceeded, causing the vehicle to tip over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.

WARNING The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac

turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

WARNING On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for

example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possi ble, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip- resistant surface.

WARNING The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting

the vehicle and for the jacking points on the ve hicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

WARNING If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the

jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in serted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.

WARNING A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack

may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel re moved by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 242

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General information The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suitable objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the roll ing direction.

Lug bolt lock

Concept The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding.

Overview The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 257.

Lug bolt, arrow 1. Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. 2. Unscrew the lug bolt. 3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the

lug bolt.

Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces

sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug bolt.

2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening tor que is 140 Nm.

3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screwing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip

ground at a safe distance from traffic. Switch on the hazard warning system. Set the parking brake. Engage a gear or move the selector lever to

position P. As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,

have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out

Seite 243

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

243Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

Depending on the equipment version, get tools and the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appro priate distance.

Secure the vehicle additionally against roll ing.

Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo cated at the marked positions.

Jacking up the vehicle WARNING Hands and fingers can be jammed when

using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and

do not change this position while using the ve hicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehi cle jack crank or lever clockwise.

4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand.

Seite 244

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle beneath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.

7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire surface of the jack is in contact with the ground and the wheel in question is raised a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the ground.

Mounting a wheel Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts. 2. Remove the wheel. 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on

and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight. If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac companying lug bolts may have to be used as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat tern.

5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclock wise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle.

6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se curely.

After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight

ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm. 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo

area, if necessary. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op portunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the nearest dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 245

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

245Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Engine compartment Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Filler neck for washer fluid 2 Vehicle identification number 3 Coolant reservoir, high-voltage technology 4 Oil filler neck

5 Jump-starting, positive terminal 6 Jump-starting, negative terminal 7 Unlocking, charging cable 8 Coolant reservoir, engine

Seite 246

MOBILITY Engine compartment

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Hood Safety information

WARNING Improperly executed work in the engine

compartment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of personal and property damage. The manufac turer of your vehicle recommends that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine compartment be performed by a dealers serv ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

WARNING The engine compartment accommodates

moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radia tor fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING There are protruding parts, for instance

locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

WARNING An incorrectly locked hood can open

while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor rectly close the hood.

WARNING Body parts can be jammed when opening

and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.

NOTE Folded-away wipers can be jammed

when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTE When the hood is closed, it must engage

on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energet ically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening the hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.

Indicator/warning lights When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 247

Engine compartment MOBILITY

247Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Closing the hood

Let the hood fall from approx. 16 inches/40 cm, arrow. The hood must engage on both sides.

Seite 248

MOBILITY Engine compartment

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Engine oil Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measure ment. The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for example: Sporty driving style. Break-in of the engine. Idling of the engine. With use of engine oil types that are classi

fied as not suitable. Different Check Control messages appear, de pending on the engine oil level.

Safety information NOTE An engine oil level that is too low causes

engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTE Too much engine oil can damage the en

gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much en gine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealers service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

Electronic oil measure ment General information The electronic oil measurement has two meas uring principles: Monitoring. Detailed measurement. When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for instance when taking curves aggressively, regularly per form a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

Concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the Control Display. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

Functional requirements A current measured value is available after ap prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the combustion engine running.

Seite 249

Engine oil MOBILITY

249Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, suffi ciently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Concept The engine oil level is checked when the vehi cle is stationary and displayed via a scale. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

General information During the measurement, the idle speed is in creased somewhat.

Functional requirements Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. Drive-ready state is established. Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se

lector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.

The combustion engine is at operating tem perature.

Performing a detailed measurement Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level"

4. "Measure engine oil level" 5. "Start measurement" The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Adding engine oil General information Only add engine oil when the message is dis played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message dis played in the instrument cluster. Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to page 251. Safely park the vehicle and switch off the igni tion and drive-ready state before adding en gine oil. Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Safety information WARNING Operating materials, for instance oils,

greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful in gredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op erating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

NOTE An engine oil level that is too low causes

engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTE Too much engine oil can damage the en

gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much en gine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealers

Seite 250

MOBILITY Engine oil

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

Overview The oil filler neck is located in the engine com partment, refer to page 246.

Adding engine oil 1. Open the hood, refer to page 247. 2. Open the lid counterclockwise, arrow.

3. Add engine oil. 4. Close the cap.

Engine oil types to add General information The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Safety information NOTE Oil additives can damage the engine.

There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil additives.

NOTE Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc

tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property. When selecting an en gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil rating.

Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat ing standards: Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

More information about suitable engine oil rat ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re quested from a dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.

Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en gine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

API SL, API SM, or API SN.

Viscosity grades Gasoline engine: When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a label in the engine com partment. Viscosity class SAE 0W-20 is only suitable for particular engines. More information about suitable engine oil rat ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re quested from a dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 251

Engine oil MOBILITY

251Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Engine oil change NOTE Engine oil that is not changed in timely

fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not exceed the service data in dicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.

Seite 252

MOBILITY Engine oil

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Coolant Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit able additives is available from a dealers serv ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information WARNING With the engine hot and the cooling sys

tem open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

WARNING Additives are harmful and incorrect addi

tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi tives only.

Coolant level Concept The vehicle features two cooling circuits. Al ways check the coolant levels of both coolant reservoirs and refill as needed.

Overview The coolant reservoir is in the engine compart ment, refer to page 246. Open the hood, refer to page 247.

Checking There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excess pres sure to dissipate, then open it.

Seite 253

Coolant MOBILITY

253Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

3. Open the coolant reservoir lid. 4. The coolant level is correct if it lies between

the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

Adding 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excess pres sure to dissipate, then open it.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Close the cap. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi

nated as soon as possible.

Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen tal protection regulations when dispos ing of coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 254

MOBILITY Coolant

254 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Maintenance Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

MINI maintenance system The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the op erational reliability of the vehicle. In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary according to the country-specific version. Re placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa rately. Further information is available from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS Concept Sensors and special algorithms take into ac count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to calculate the need for mainte nance. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information Information on service requirements, refer to page 119, can be displayed on the Control Dis play.

Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. The dealers service center can read this data out and suggest an optimized maintenance scope for the vehicle. Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat tery was disconnected are not taken into ac count. If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent maintenance pro cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty In formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Book let for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require ments. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a

Seite 255

Maintenance MOBILITY

255Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regu lar maintenance and repair work should be re tained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Safety information

NOTE The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an

intricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicles primary emissions system. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for pur poses of properly utilizing the socket for On board Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi cle's emissions.

Emissions The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos sible.

The warning light flashes under certain cir cumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfir ing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri ous engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic con verter.

Seite 256

MOBILITY Maintenance

256 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Replacing components Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard ve hicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blade replacement Safety information

NOTE The window may sustain damage if the

wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade in stalled. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper

blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper with out a wiper blade installed.

NOTE Folded-away wipers can be jammed

when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Front wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out

the wiper blade, arrow 2.

4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade must engage audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Seite 257

Replacing components MOBILITY

257Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Rear wiper blade 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. 2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper arm.

3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade must engage audibly.

4. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replace ment General information

Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have appropriate work performed by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfami liar with it or if it has not been described here. A spare light box is available from a dealers service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop. Follow the safety information, refer to page 258.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Some items of equipment use light-emitting di odes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to con ventional lasers and are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 258.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs WARNING Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con

tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

WARNING Work on switched-on lighting systems

can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac turer's instructions.

NOTE Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.

There is a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) WARNING Too intensive brightness can irritate or

damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.

Headlight glass Condensation can form on the inside of the ex ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the conden sation evaporates after a short time. The head light glass does not need to be changed. If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance wa

Seite 258

MOBILITY Replacing components

258 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

ter droplets in the light, have the headlights checked.

Headlight setting The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed, have it checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealers service center or another qualified service center or re pair shop.

Front halogen lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Halogen headlights

1 High beams 2 Low beams 3 Turn signal

Bug light

1 Parking lights 2 Daytime running lights 3 Fog lights

High beams Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 258. Bulbs: H7

1. Open the hood, refer to page 247. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.

3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pull it out of the headlight toward the rear, ar row 2.

4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. 5. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in

reverse order of removal. In doing so, en sure that the bulb tab is correctly posi tioned in the headlight housing and the bulb holder perceptibly engages.

6. Check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.

7. Close the headlight housing with the lid. Make sure that the lid engages.

Low beams Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 258.

Seite 259

Replacing components MOBILITY

259Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Bulbs: H7

1. Turn the steering wheel. 2. On the left facing the driving direction:

turn the cover clockwise and remove it. On the right facing the driving direc

tion: turn the cover counterclockwise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise, and remove it.

4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, and pull it downward out of the headlight, arrow 2.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder. 6. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in

reverse order of removal. In doing so, en sure that the bulb tab is correctly posi

tioned in the headlight housing and the bulb holder perceptibly engages.

7. Check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.

8. Install the covers. Make sure that the covers engage.

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 258. Bulbs: PWY24W

1. Turn the steering wheel. 2. On the left facing the driving direction:

turn the cover clockwise and remove it. On the right facing the driving direc

tion: turn the cover counterclockwise and remove it.

3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise, and remove it.

Seite 260

MOBILITY Replacing components

260 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, ar row 1, and remove, arrow 2.

5. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn counterclockwise and remove.

6. Insert the new bulb and install the covers in the reverse order. Make sure that the cov ers engage.

Parking lights/fog lights/daytime running lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 258. Bulbs: Parking lights: W5W Daytime running light: PSX24W. Fog light: H8.

Replacing the bulbs 1. Pull the cover forward out of the bumper.

2. Remove the screws and take out the front light.

3. Remove the bulb holder. Parking lights: turn the bulb holder, ar

row 1, counterclockwise and remove. Daytime running lights: squeeze the

upper and lower locks of the bulb, ar row 2, and remove the bulb. For better accessibility, remove the bulb of the fog light as needed.

Fog lights: turn the bulb, arrow 3, coun terclockwise and remove it.

Seite 261

Replacing components MOBILITY

261Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

4. Parking lights: pull the bulb out of the fixture.

Fog lights and daytime running lights: disconnect the bulb from the cable.

5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order. The daytime running lights bulb holder en gages audibly, first below, then above.

LED front lights, bulb replacement

General information The following lights feature LED technology: Daytime running lights High beams Low beams Cornering light Parking lights Fog lights In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealers service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop.

Overview

Position of the headlights

1 Turn signal 2 Daytime running lights 3 Low beams/high beams 4 Cornering light

LED bug light

1 Parking lights 2 Fog lights

Turn signal Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 258. Bulbs: PWY24W.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 247. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, ar row 1, and remove, arrow 2.

Seite 262

MOBILITY Replacing components

262 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

4. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder, turn counterclockwise and remove.

5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

1 Side tail lights 2 Center brake light 3 License plate light

Side tail lights

1 Brake lights/tail lights 2 Turn signal 3 Reversing lights

Side LED tail lights

1 Brake light 2 Tail lights 3 Turn signal 4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 258. Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights:

P21W Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights: H21W Bulb, turn signal: P21W Bulb, reversing lights: P21W 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Through the opening, loosen the plug con nector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Seite 263

Replacing components MOBILITY

263Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Press the latches together, arrows 1, and remove the bulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening. 5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the

socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights. Arrow 2: turn signal. Arrow 3: reversing light.

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas teners.

Central brake light and license plate lights Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 258. The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealers service cen ter or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 258.

Bulb: WY5W

1. Push the side turn signal forward in the driving direction, arrow 1, and swing it out ward, arrow 2.

2. On the left facing the driving direction: turn the bulb holder clockwise and re move.

On the right facing the driving direc tion: turn the bulb holder counterclock wise and remove.

3. Replace the bulb. 4. Insert the bulb holder. 5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1, and

swing it forward, arrow 2.

Vehicle battery Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free. The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery.

Seite 264

MOBILITY Replacing components

264 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

More information about the battery can be re quested from a dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.

Replacing the vehicle battery

General information The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have a dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the bat tery has been registered again, all comfort fea tures will be available without restriction and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.

Safety information NOTE Vehicle batteries that are not compatible

can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of personal and prop erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be in stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealers service center.

Charging the battery

General information Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.

The battery may need to be charged in the fol lowing cases: When making frequent short-distance

drives. If the vehicle is not used for more than a

month.

Steptronic transmission: when parked for long periods of time in selector lever posi tion D, R or N.

Safety information NOTE Battery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board net work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect bat tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compart ment.

Starting aid terminals In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 268, in the engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings up dated, for example: Time: update. Date: update. Seat and mirror memory: store the posi

tions again. Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by a dealers service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop or

take them to a collection point. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Seite 265

Replacing components MOBILITY

265Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Fuses Safety information

WARNING Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload

electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub stitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses The fuses are located in the glove compart ment.

1. Open the glove compartment. 2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

Seite 266

MOBILITY Replacing components

266 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Breakdown assistance Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hazard warning flash ers

The button is located above the Control Dis play.

The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.

Roadside Assistance General information Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain assis tance there in the event of a vehicle break down.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit General information Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents reg ularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

Jump-starting General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles. Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be used for jump-starting.

Seite 267

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

267Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Safety information DANGER Contact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

WARNING If the jumper cables are connected in the

incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order during connection.

NOTE In the case of body contact between the

two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no body contact oc curs.

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine com partment acts as the battery's positive terminal. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

A special connection on the body acts as the battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce dure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Establishing drive-ready state 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and

let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.

2. Establish the drive-ready state for the vehi cle to be started as usual. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another

Seite 268

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

268 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing Transporting the vehicle

General information The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Safety information NOTE The vehicle can be damaged when tow

ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading plat form.

Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, push it for a short distance at a speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h. Roll or push, refer to page 106, the vehicle.

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

NOTE The vehicle can become damaged when

lifting and securing it. There is a risk of damage to property. Lift the vehicle using suitable means. Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow

fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Towing other vehicles

General information Switch on the hazard warning system, depend ing on local regulations. If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Safety information WARNING If the approved gross vehicle weight of

the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehicle's re sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

NOTE If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in

correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc cur. There is a risk of damage to property. Cor rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the following:

Seite 269

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

269Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.

The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car ried in the vehicle. The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle. The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 257, are together in the cargo area. Use of the tow fitting: Use only the tow fitting provided with the

vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for

instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Safety information NOTE If the tow fitting is not used as intended,

there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel. Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission Do not tow-start the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealers service center or an other qualified service center or repair shop.

What to do after an acci dent Safety information

WARNING Contact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. After an accident, do not touch

Seite 270

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

270 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

any high-voltage components such as orange colored high-voltage cables or parts that are in contact with exposed high-voltage cables.

WARNING Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor

rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch flu ids escaping from the high-voltage battery.

General information After an accident, compliance with the follow ing safety precautions is required with regard to the high-voltage system: Secure the crash site. Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or

firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage system.

Engage selector lever position P, set the parking brake, and switch off the ignition and drive-ready state.

Lock the vehicle after exiting. Do not inhale any gases escaping from the

high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a safe distance from the vehicle.

Seite 271

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

271Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Care Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Washing the vehicle General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam age the vehicle.

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

Safety information NOTE When cleaning with high-pressure wash

ers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain suffi cient distance and do not spray too long con tinuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.

Distances and temperature Maximum temperature: 140 /60 . Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,

seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information NOTE Improper use of automatic vehicle

washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the fol lowing instructions: Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or

those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.

Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis.

Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.

Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors.

With rod antenna: unscrew the rod antenna to avoid rod antenna breakage.

Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys tem.

Driving into a vehicle wash with a Steptronic transmission In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely. Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 106. Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Seite 272

MOBILITY Care

272 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Driving out of a vehicle wash Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. Activate drive-ready state, refer to page 90.

Headlights Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water. Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Completely remove all residues on the win dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care Vehicle care products

General information MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care products are available from a dealers service center or another qualified service center or re pair shop.

Safety information WARNING Cleansers can contain substances that are

dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products

intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in structions on the container.

Vehicle paint

General information Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre quency and extent of your vehicle care to these influences. Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed im mediately to prevent the finish from being al tered or discolored.

Matte finish Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish.

Leather care Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Seite 273

Care MOBILITY

273Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Upholstery material care

General information Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac uum cleaner. If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma terial vigorously.

Safety information NOTE Open Velcro fasteners on articles of

clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 /60 . Follow the manufac turer's instructions. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disc. After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry them. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces Carefully clean components such as the radia tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic ularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components NOTE Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,

such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease re movers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with water.

Plastic components are e.g.: Imitation leather surfaces. Roofliner. Light lenses. Instrument cluster cover. Matt black spray-coated components. Painted parts in the car's interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with water. Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts WARNING Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety

belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger

Seite 274

MOBILITY Care

274 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for clean ing the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats WARNING Objects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and can not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were re moved, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte rior for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass deter gent.

Displays/Screens/Projection lenses NOTE Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of

any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop erty. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

NOTE The surface of displays can be damaged

with improper cleaning. There is a risk of dam age to property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, refer to page 126.

Long idle times and long-term vehicle storage

Concept For idle phases that last several weeks, park the vehicle with a fully charged battery if possible. Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if the electric range is exhausted. With storage times of up to three months, if possible plug the vehicle into a compatible power source or park it in a nearly fully charged state.

General information Your dealer's service center or another quali fied service center or repair shop can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehi cle for longer than three months.

Safety information NOTE The high-voltage battery can be dam

aged by excessive discharge. There is a risk of damage to property. Before storing the vehicle for an extended period, ensure that the high- voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle period, connect the vehicle to a charging sta tion at a compatible charging location. If neces sary, the high-voltage battery will be charged automatically. Make sure that the charging process takes place. Regularly check the charge state.

Seite 275

Care MOBILITY

275Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer than three months with a charge state below approx. 50 %.

Seite 276

MOBILITY Care

276 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Seite 277

Care MOBILITY

277Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

FIND ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Technical data Vehicle features and op tions This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information The technical data and specifications in this Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected special equip ment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed values can be found in the approval documents, on labels on

the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealers service center or another qualified service cen ter or repair shop. The information in the vehicle documents al ways has priority over the information in this Owner's Manual.

Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for instance a roof antenna,

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for instance due to the selected special equip ment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Countryman

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.9/2,005

Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.7/1,822

Height inches/mm 61.4/1,559

Length inches/mm 169.8/4,314

Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.5/11.4

Seite 280

REFERENCE Technical data

280 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Weights

MINI Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,016/2,275

Load lbs/kg 926/420

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,458/1,115

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,646/1,200

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 364/165

Capacities

MINI Countryman US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank, approx. 9.5/36.0 Fuel quality, refer to page 229.

Seite 281

Technical data REFERENCE

281Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Appendix Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve hicle are listed here.

Updates after the edito rial deadline These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual contain updates made after the editorial dead line: Information: vehicle identification number,

refer to page 12.

Seite 282

REFERENCE Appendix

282 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Seite 283

Appendix REFERENCE

283Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys

tem 155 Accessories and parts 8 Accident, what to do 270 ACC, see Camera-based cruise

control 159 Acoustic pedestrian protec

tion 94 AC quick charging cable, see

Level 2 charging cable 220 Activated-charcoal filter 183 Activating, drive-ready

state 91 Active Cruise Control, see

Camera-based cruise con trol 159

Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 146

Adapting to the course of the road, hybrid system 112

Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force display 152

Additives, oil 251 Adjustments, steering

wheel 83 Advance climate control, see

Stationary climate con trol 184

After washing vehicle 273 Airbags 136 Airbags, indicator and warning

light 138 Air circulation, see Recircu

lated-air mode 178, 182 Air conditioner 177 Air conditioning 178, 181 Air, dehumidifying, see Air

conditioning 178, 181

Air distribution, manual 179, 182

Air flow, air conditioner 178 Air flow, automatic climate

control 182 Air pressure, tires 231 Air vents, see Ventilation 183 Alarm system 67 Alarm triggering 67 Alarm, unintentional 68 Alertness assistant 153 All-season tires, see Winter

tires 236 Alternative oil types 251 Antifreeze, washer fluid 104 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 155 Anti-slip control, see DSC 155 Anti-theft protection, lug

bolts 243 App, MINI Motorers Guide 44 Approach control warning

with city light braking func tion 147

Approved axle load 281 Apps, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertain ment, Communication 6

Arrival time 123 Artificial engine noise, see

Acoustic pedestrian protec tion 94

Ash tray 190 Assistance for the combustion

engine 95 Assistance when driving

off 158 AUTO intensity 181 Automatic climate con

trol 180 Automatic Curb Monitor 82

Automatic deactivation, front- seat passenger airbags 138

Automatic headlight con trol 131

Automatic locking 66 Automatic recirculated-air

control 182 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 105 Automatic unlocking 66 Automatic vehicle wash 272 AUTO program, automatic cli

mate control 181 AUTO program, intensity 181 Auto Start/Stop function 92 Auto washing 272 AUX-IN port, position in vehi

cle 191 AUX-IN port, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Average fuel consump tion 123

Average speed 123 Axle loads, weights 281

B Backrest curvature, see Lum

bar support 74, 75 Backrest, seats 73 Band-aids, see First-aid

kit 267 Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 265 Battery, vehicle 264 Being towed, see Tow-starting

and towing 269 Belts, safety belts 76

Seite 284

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

284 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Beverage holder, cup holder 194

Blocking, power window 70 Bluetooth connection 36 Bottle holder, see Cup

holder 194 Brake assistant 155 Brake discs, break-in 206 Brake force display 152 Brake lights, brake force dis

play 152 Brake pads, break-in 206 Braking, information 207 Breakdown assistance 267 Breakdown assistance, Road

side Assistance 267 Break-in 206 Brightness of Control Dis

play 33 Bug light 259 Bulb replacement 258 Bulb replacement,

front 259, 262 Bulb replacement, rear 263 Bulb replacement, side 264 Bulbs and lights 258 Button, Start/Stop 89 Bypassing, see Jump-start

ing 267

C Calendar, see Owner's Hand

book for Navigation, Enter tainment, Communication 6

California Proposition 65 Warning 9

Calling up mirror adjust ment 66

Calling up seat adjustment 66 Camera-based assistance sys

tems, see Intelligent Safety 146

Camera-based cruise con trol 159

Camera lenses, care 275

Camera, rearview cam era 171

Can holder, see Cup holder 194

Care, displays 275 Care, vehicle 273 Care, washing the vehicle 272 Cargo area 196 Cargo area, adapting size 200 Cargo area, enlarging 198 Cargo area lid 60 Cargo area, loading 197 Cargo area, seating sur

face 200 Cargo area, storage compart

ments 198 Cargo cover 197 Cargo, stowing and secur

ing 197 Cargo straps 197 Carpet, care 275 Catalytic converter, see Hot

exhaust gas system 207 CBS Condition Based Serv

ice 255 CD, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertain ment, Communication 6

Center armrest 194 Center console 18 Central Information Display

(CID) 20 Central Information Display

(CID) operating concept 20 Central instrument cluster,

LED ring 125 Central locking system, un

locking, from inside 57 Central screen, see Control

Display 20 Changes, technical, see For

Your Own Safety 8 Changing parts 257 Changing wheels 242 Changing wheels/tires 235 CHARGE, energy recovery 95

Charge indicator, high-voltage battery 122

Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 218

Charging cable storage 220 Charging cable, unlocking

manually 221 Charging screen 110 Charging, see Charging the

vehicle 218 Charging, see Vehicle charg

ing 218 Charging status, see Display of

the charging status 222 Charging the vehicle 218 Charging the vehicle, see Ve

hicle charging 218 Chassis number, see Vehicle

identification number 12 Check Control 113 Checking the oil level elec

tronically 249 Children, seating position 84 Children, transporting

safely 84 Child restraint system 84 Child restraint system

LATCH 86 Child restraint systems,

mounting 85 Child safety locks 88 Child seat, mounting 85 Child seats 84 Chrome parts, care 274 Cigarette lighter 190 Cleaning, displays 275 Climate control 177, 180 Clothes hooks 195 Coasting 94 Combination switch, see Turn

signals 97 Combi switch, see Wiper sys

tem 97, 101 Comfort Access 57 Compartments in the

doors 194

Seite 285

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

285Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Compass 188 Compatible devices, see Suita

ble devices 36 Compressor 238 Computer, see Onboard Com

puter 121 Condensation on win

dows 183 Condensation under the vehi

cle 208 Condition Based Service

CBS 255 Configuring driving pro

gram 158 Confirmation signal 66 Connecting device 35 Connecting mobile phone 35 Connecting smartphone 35 Connecting telephone 35 Connections 35 Contacts, see Owner's Hand

book for Navigation, Enter tainment, Communication 6

Contact with water, hybrid system 49

Continued driving with a flat tire 142, 146

Control Display 20 Control Display, settings 32 Controller 21, 22 Controller operation 22 Control systems, driving stabil

ity 155 Convenient closing 53 Convenient opening 53 Coolant 253 Cooling, maximum 181 Cooling system 253 Cornering light 132 Corrosion on brake discs 208 Cosmetic mirror 190 Country timer 128 Coupling, see Pairing 35 Courtesy lights during unlock

ing 53

Courtesy lights with the vehi cle locked 54

Cruise control 165 Cruise control, active 159 Cruise control with distance

control, see Camera-based cruise control 159

Cruise control without dis tance control, see Cruise control 165

Cruising range 118 Cup holder 194 Current fuel consumption 118

D Damage, tires 235 Data memory 9 Data protection, settings 34 Data, technical 280, 281 Date 33 Date display 117 Daytime running lights 132 DCC, see Cruise control 165 Deactivating drive-ready

state 91 Deactivation of the hybrid sys

tem 49 Defrosting, see Defrosting the

windows 179 Defrosting, see Windows, de

frosting 183 Defrosting the windows 179 Dehumidifying, air 178, 181 Deleting personal data 35 Deletion of personal data 35 Departure times, stationary

climate control 185 Destination distance 123 Device list 35 Digital clock 117 Digital compass 188 Dimensions 280 Dimmable exterior mirrors 82 Dimmable interior mirror 83

Direction indicator, see Turn signals 97

Display, electronic, instrument cluster 110

Display, engine tempera ture 123

Display, GREEN Mode 213 Display lighting, see Instru

ment lighting 133 Displays 109 Displays, care 275 Displays, hybrid system 111 Disposal, coolant 254 Disposal, vehicle battery 265 Distance control, see PDC 167 Distance to destination 123 Divided screen view, split

screen 27 Drive-off assistant 158 Drive-off assistant, see

DSC 155 Driver assistance, see Intelli

gent Safety 146 Drive-ready state 89 Drive-ready state, activat

ing 91 Drive-ready state, deacti

vate 91 Drive-ready state in detail 90 Driver profiles 63 Driver profiles, exporting pro

files 65 Driver profiles, importing pro

files 65 Driving Dynamics Control, see

MINI Driving Modes switch 157

Driving Excitement, SPORT 124

Driving instructions, break- in 206

Driving instructions, hybrid system 212

Driving mode, GREEN 213 Driving modes 157 Driving notes, general 206

Seite 286

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

286 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Driving on poor roads 209 Driving on racetracks 210 Driving stability control sys

tems 155 Driving tips 206 Driving with combustion en

gine, POWER 94 DSC Dynamic Stability Con

trol 155 DTC Dynamic Traction Con

trol 156 DVD, Video, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 155

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 156

E eASSIST, assistance for the

combustion engine 95 Easy Opener 59 eBOOST, assistance for the

combustion engine 95 eDRIVE button 93 eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 47 Electrical drive-ready state 91 Electric driving, ePOWER 92 Electric driving, MAX

eDRIVE 93 Electric driving, SAVE BAT

TERY 94 Electronic displays, instrument

cluster 110 Electronic oil measure

ment 249 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, see DSC 155 E-mail, see Owner's Hand

book for Navigation, Enter tainment, Communication 6

Emergency release, fuel filler flap 227

Emergency service, see Road side Assistance 267

Emergency unlocking, charg ing cable 221

Energy Control 118 Energy recovery, CHARGE 95 Engine, automatic stop 92 Engine compartment 246 Engine compartment, working

in 247 Engine coolant 253 Engine noise, artificial, see

Acoustic pedestrian protec tion 94

Engine oil 249 Engine oil, adding 250 Engine oil additives 251 Engine oil change 252 Engine oil filler neck 250 Engine oil types, alterna

tive 251 Engine oil types, suitable 251 Engine start, combustion en

gine 91 Engine start, jump-start

ing 267 Engine temperature, dis

play 123 Entering a destination, see

Owner's Handbook for Navi gation, Entertainment, Com munication 6

Entering an address, naviga tion, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Entering a vehicle wash 272 ePOWER, electric driving 92 Equipment, interior 186 Error displays, see Check Con

trol 113 ESP Electronic Stability Pro

gram, see DSC 155 Exchanging wheels/tires 235 Exhaust gas system 207 Exiting a vehicle wash 272

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 82

Exterior mirrors 81 Exterior mirrors, Automatic

Curb Monitor 82 Exterior mirrors, malfunc

tion 82 External start 267 External temperature dis

play 117 External temperature warn

ing 117 Eyes for securing cargo 197

F Failure message, see Check

Control 113 False alarm, see Unintentional

alarm 68 Fan, see Air flow 178, 182 Fastening safety belts, see

Safety belts 76 Filler neck for engine oil 250 Finding charging stations, see

Charging stations and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Fine wood, care 274 First-aid kit 267 Flat tire, changing wheels 242 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 144 Flat tire, repairing 237 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 139 Flat tire, warning

light 141, 145 Flooding 207 Floor carpet, care 275 Floor mats, care 275 Fogged up windows 179 Fold-away position, wind

shield wipers 100, 103

Seite 287

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

287Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Fold back rear seat back rests 198

Foot brake 207 For Your Own Safety 8 Front airbags 136 Front fog lights 133 Front-seat passenger airbags,

automatic deactivation 138 Front-seat passenger airbags,

indicator light 139 Front seats 73 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 144 Fuel 229 Fuel cap 227 Fuel consumption, see Aver

age fuel consumption 123 Fuel filler flap 227 Fuel gauge 117 Fuel quality 229 Fuel recommendation 229 Fuel, tank capacity 281 Functions, hybrid system 47 Fuse 266

G Garage door opener, see

Integrated Universal Remote Control 186

Gasoline 229 General driving notes 206 General settings 32 Glare shield 190 Glass sunroof, initialize the

system 72 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic

glass sunroof 70 Glove compartment 193 GPS, navigation, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

GREEN Mode 213 GREEN - program, driving dy

namics 157

Gross vehicle weight, ap proved 281

Ground clearance 208

H Halogen headlights 259 Handbrake, see Parking

brake 95 Hand-held transmitter, alter

nating code 187 Hands-free kit, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Hazard warning flashers 267 Head airbag 136 Headlight control, auto

matic 131 Headlight courtesy delay fea

ture 131 Headlight flasher 97 Headlight glass 258 Headlights, care 273 Head restraints, front 78 Head restraints, rear 79 Head-up Display 126 Head-up Display, see Memory

function 80 Head-up Display, standard

view 127 Heavy cargo, stowing

cargo 197 High-beam Assistant 132 High beams 97 High beams/low beams, see

High-beam Assistant 132 High-voltage battery, charge

indicator 122 Hills 208 Hill start assistant, see Drive-

off assistant 158 Holder for beverages 194 Homepage 6 Hood 247 Horn 16

Hot exhaust gas system 207 Hotline, see Owner's Hand

book for Navigation, Enter tainment, Communication 6

HUD Head-up Display 126 Hybrid system, adapting to

the course of the road 112 Hybrid system, at a glance 47 Hybrid system, automatic de

activation 49 Hybrid system, contact with

water 49 Hybrid system, displays 111 Hybrid system, safety 49 Hybrid system, working on 49 Hydroplaning 207

I Ice warning, see External tem

perature warning 117 Icy roads, see External tem

perature warning 117 Identification marks, tires 233 Identification number, see Ve

hicle identification num ber 12

Ignition off 89 Ignition on 89 Illuminated ring, central in

strument cluster 125 Indication of a flat

tire 141, 145 Indicator light, see Check Con

trol 113 Individual air distribu

tion 179, 182 Individual settings, see Driver

profiles 63 Inductive charging, see Wire

less charging, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Inflation pressure, tires 231

Seite 288

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

288 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Inflation pressure warning, tires 144

Info Display, see Onboard Computer 121

Information 6 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni

tor TPM 140 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 144 Instrument cluster 109 Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 110 Instrument lighting 133 Integrated key 56 Integrated Owner's Manual in

the vehicle 43 Intelligent Safety 146 Intended use 8 Intensity, AUTO program 181 Interior equipment 186 Interior lights 134 Interior lights during unlock

ing 53 Interior lights with the vehicle

locked 54 Interior mirror 81 Interior mirror, automatic

dimming feature 83 Interior mirror, compass 188 Interior mirror, manually dim

mable 83 Interior motion sensor 68 Internet site 6 Interval display, service re

quirements 119 Interval mode 98, 102 In the vicinity of the center

console 18 In the vicinity of the roof

liner 19 In the vicinity of the steering

wheel 16

J Jacking points for the vehicle

jack 244 Jam protection system, glass

sunroof 71 Jam protection system, win

dows 69 Jump-starting 267

K Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac

cess 57 Key, see Integrated key 56 Key, see Remote control 52 Kickdown, Steptronic trans

mission 107 Knee airbag 137

L Label on recommended

tires 236 Label, runflat tires 237 Language, on the Control Dis

play 32 Lashing eyes 197 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 86 Leather, care 273 LED ring, central instrument

cluster 125 LEDs, light-emitting di

odes 258 Letters and numbers, enter

ing 24 Level 1 charging 223 Level 1 charging cable 220 Level 2 charging cable 220 Light 130 Light-alloy wheels, care 274 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 258 Lighter 190 Lighting 130

Light replacement 258 Light replacement,

front 259, 262 Light replacement, rear 263 Light replacement, side 264 Lights and bulbs 258 Light switch 130 List of all messages 34 Load 197 Loading 196 Locking, automatic 66 Locking, from inside 57 Locking, settings 65 Longer idle phases 275 Long idle times and long-term

vehicle storage 275 Long-term vehicle stor

age 275 Low beams 130 Low beams, automatic, see

High-beam Assistant 132 Lower back support 75 Lower back support, mechani

cal 74 Lug bolt lock 243 Luggage rack, see Roof-

mounted luggage rack 209 Lumbar support 75 Lumbar support, mechani

cal 74

M Maintaining charge state,

SAVE BATTERY 94 Maintenance 255 Maintenance require

ments 255 Maintenance, service require

ments 119 Maintenance system,

MINI 255 Make-up mirror 190 Malfunction displays, see

Check Control 113

Seite 289

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

289Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Manual air distribu tion 179, 182

Manual air flow 178, 182 Manual brake, see Parking

brake 95 Manual mode, transmis

sion 107 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 227 Manual operation, PDC Park

Distance Control 168 Manual operation, rearview

camera 171 Manufacturer of the MINI 8 Map update, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Matte finish 273 MAX eDRIVE, electric driv

ing 93 Maximum cooling 181 Maximum speed, display 120 Maximum speed, winter

tires 236 Measurement, units of 33 Mechanical key 56 Medical kit 267 Memory function 80 Menu in instrument clus

ter 121 Menus, Central Information

Display (CID) 22 Messages 34 Messages, see Check Con

trol 113 Microfilter 179, 183 MID - program, driving dy

namics 157 MINI Connected, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

MINI driving modes 157 MINI eDRIVE, see Hybrid sys

tem 47

MINI logo projection during unlocking 53

MINI maintenance sys tem 255

MINI Motorers Guide app 44 Minimum tread, tires 235 MINI Picnic Bench 200 Mirrors 81 Mirror, see Memory func

tion 80 Mobile communication devi

ces in the vehicle 207 Mobility System 238 Modifications, technical, see

For Your Own Safety 8 Moisture in headlight 258 Monitor, see Control Dis

play 20 Motorers Guide app, see MINI

Motorers Guide app 44 Mounting of child restraint

systems 85 MP3 player, see Audio, see

Owner's Handbook for Navi gation, Entertainment, Com munication 6

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 16

Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En tertainment and Communi cation 6

Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

N Navigation, see Owner's

Manual for Navigation, En tertainment and Communi cation 6

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 78

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 79

Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 274

New wheels and tires 235 Notes, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertain ment, Communication 6

No-touch closing of the tail gate 59

No-touch opening of the tail gate 59

O OBD Onboard Diagnos

tics 256 Obstacle marking, rearview

camera 172 Octane rating, see Recom

mended fuel grade 230 Odometer 117 Office, see Owner's Manual

for Navigation, Entertain ment and Communication 6

Officially use hybrid sys tem 212

Oil 249 Oil, adding 250 Oil additives 251 Oil change 252 Oil change interval, service re

quirements 119 Oil filler neck 250 Oil types, alternative 251 Oil types, suitable 251 Old batteries, disposal 265 Onboard Computer 121 Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 256 Onboard literature,

printed 43 Onboard vehicle tool kit 257 On-call service, see Roadside

Assistance 267 Online Owner's Manual 45

Seite 290

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

290 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Opening and closing 52 Opening, from inside 57 Operating menus, Central In

formation Display (CID) 20 Operation via the Control

ler 22 Operation via touchscreen 24 Optional equipment 7 Outside air, see Automatic re

circulated-air control 182 Owner's Manual media 43 Owner's Manual, printed 43

P Paint, vehicle 273 Panic alarm, see Panic

mode 68 Panic mode 68 Panoramic glass sunroof 70 Parallel parking assistant 173 Park Distance Control

PDC 167 Parked vehicle, condensa

tion 208 Parked vehicle ventilation, see

Stationary climate con trol 184

Parking aid, see PDC 167 Parking assistant 173 Parking brake 95 Parking lights 130 Parts and accessories 8 Passenger's side mirror, tilt

ing 82 Pathway lines, rearview cam

era 171 PDC Park Distance Con

trol 167 Pedestrian protection, acous

tic 94 Performance Control 157 Personal profile, see Driver

profiles 63 Person warning with City light

braking function 150

Picnic Bench 200 Plastic, care 274 Poor roads, driving on 209 PostCrash iBrake 154 POWER, driving with combus

tion engine 94 Power failure 265 Power windows 69 Prescribed engine oil

types 251 Pressure, tires 231 Pressure warning, tires 144 Printed onboard literature 43 Profiles, see Driver profiles 63 Programmable memory but

tons, Central Information Display (CID) 28

Protective function, glass sun roof 71

Protective function, win dows 69

Push-and-turn reel, see Con troller 21, 22

Q Quick charging cable, see

Level 2 charging cable 220

R Racetrack operation 210 Radiator fluid 253 Radio-operated remote con

trol, opening/closing 52 Radio-ready state 89 Radio, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Rain sensor 98, 102 Ratchet straps 197 Rear lights 263 Rear seats 76 Rearview camera 170 Rear window de

froster 179, 183

Recirculated-air filter 183 Recirculated-air

mode 178, 182 Recommended fuel

grade 230 Recommended tire

brands 236 Refueling 226 Remaining range 118 Remote control, additional 55 Remote control, loss 55 Remote control, malfunc

tion 55 Remote control, opening/clos

ing 52 Remote control, replacing the

battery 54 Remote control, univer

sal 186 Replacing parts 257 Replacing the battery, remote

control 54 Replacing wheels/tires 235 Reporting safety malfunc

tions 13 RES CNCL button, see Camera-

based cruise control 159 RES CNCL button, see Cruise

control 165 Reserve warning, see

Range 118 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 140 Retreaded tires 236 Roadside Assistance 267 Roadside parking lights 131 Rolling code hand-held trans

mitter 187 RON recommended fuel

grade 230 Roofliner 19 Roof load capacity 281 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 209 Route, navigation, see Own

er's Handbook for Naviga

Seite 291

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

291Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

tion, Entertainment, Com munication 6

RSC Runflat System Compo nent, see Runflat tires 237

Rubber components, care 274

Runflat tires 237

S Safe braking 207 Safety belt reminder for driv

er's seat and front passenger seat 78

Safety belts 76 Safety belts, care 274 Safety locks, doors, and win

dows 88 Safety of the hybrid sys

tem 49 Safety switch, windows 70 Safety systems, airbags 136 SAVE BATTERY, electric driv

ing 94 Saving fuel 211 Screen, see Control Display 20 Screwdriver 257 Sealant, see Mobility Sys

tem 238 Seat heating, front 76 Seating position for chil

dren 84 Seat, see Memory function 80 Seats, front 73 Seats, rear 76 Securing cargo 197 Selection list in instrument

cluster 121 Sensors, care 275 Service and warranty 9 Service requirements, Condi

tion Based Service CBS 255 Service requirements, dis

play 119 Servotronic 158

SET button, see Camera-based cruise control 159

SET button, see Cruise con trol 165

Settings, locking/unlocking 65 Settings, mirrors 81 Settings on the Control Dis

play 32 Shift gate rotary switch 157 Side airbag 136 Signaling, horn 16 Signals when unlocking 66 Sitting safely 73 Size 280 Slide/tilt glass roof 70 SMS, see Short messages, see

Owner's Handbook for Navi gation, Entertainment, Com munication 6

SMS text messages, supple mentary 116

Snow chains 241 Socket 190 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag

nostics 256 Software update 41 Sound output, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Speed, average 123 Speed Limit Info 120 Speed Limit Info, Onboard

Computer 123 Speed limits, display 120 Speed warning 125 Split screen 27 Sport displays 124 SPORT program, driving dy

namics 157 Sport program, transmis

sion 107 Stability control systems 155 Standard charging cable, see

Level 1 charging cable 220

Standard charging, see Level 1 charging 223

Standard equipment 7 Standard view, Head-up Dis

play 127 Start/Stop button 89 Starting the combustion en

gine 91 Stationary climate control 184 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Status control display, tires 140

Status information, Central In formation Display (CID) 27

Status of Owner's Manual 8 Status, vehicle 129 Steering assistance 158 Steering wheel, adjusting 83 Steptronic transmission 105 Storage compartments 193 Storage, tires 237 Storing the charging cable,

see Storage 220 Storing the vehicle 275 Stowing and securing

cargo 197 Suitable devices 36 Suitable mobile phones 36 Summer tires, tread 234 Sun visor 190 Supplementary Owner's Man

uals 43 Supplementary SMS text mes

sages 116 Switch for driving dynam

ics 157 Switch, see Cockpit 16 Symbols 7 Symbols in the status field 27

T Tailgate 60

Seite 292

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

292 Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

Tailgate, closing with no- touch activation 59

Tailgate, opening with no- touch activation 59

Tailgate via remote control 54 Tail lights 263 Tank unlocking, see Tank

vent 226 Tank vent 226 Technical changes, see For

Your Own Safety 8 Technical data 280, 281 Telephone, see Owner's

Manual for Navigation, En tertainment and Communi cation 6

Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Temperature, air condi tioner 178

Temperature, automatic cli mate control 180

Temperature display for exter nal temperature 117

Temperature, engine 123 Terminal, starting aid 268 Theft alarm system, see Alarm

system 67 Thigh support 75 Tilt alarm sensor 68 Tilting, passenger's side mir

ror 82 Time 32 Time of arrival 123 Tire damage 235 Tire identification marks 233 Tire inflation pressure 231 Tire inflation pressure moni

tor, see FTM 144 Tire pressure 231 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 139 Tire repair kit, see Mobility

System 238

Tires, changing 235 Tire sealant, see Mobility Sys

tem 238 Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 231 Tires, runflat 237 Tire tread 234 Tone, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Tools 257 Total vehicle weight 281 Touchpad 26 Touchscreen 24 Towing 269 Tow-starting 269 TPM Tire Pressure Moni

tor 139 Traction control 156 TRACTION driving mode, driv

ing dynamics 156 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's

Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Transmission lock, releasing manually 108

Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 105

Transporting children safely 84

Tread, tires 234 Trip computer 123 Triple turn signal activa

tion 97 Trip odometer 117 Trip recorder, see Trip odome

ter 117 Turning radius lines, rearview

camera 172 Turn signal, front 259, 262 Turn signal, side 264 Turn signals, operation 97 Turn signals, rear, bulb re

placement 263

U Unintentional alarm 68 Units of measurement 33 Universal remote control 186 Unlocking, automatic 66 Unlocking, settings 65 Updates made after the edito

rial deadline 8 Upholstery care 274 USB connection 38 USB interface, position in vehi

cle 191 USB port, see USB inter

face 191 Use, intended 8

V Vanity mirror 190 Vehicle battery 264 Vehicle battery, replacing 265 Vehicle, break-in 206 Vehicle care 273 Vehicle care products 273 Vehicle features and op

tions 7 Vehicle identification num

ber 12 Vehicle jack 244 Vehicle paint 273 Vehicle status 129 Vehicle wash 272 Vehicle, washing 272 Ventilation 183 Venting, see Stationary cli

mate control 184 VIN, see Vehicle identification

number 12 Voice activation system 29 Voice command response, see

Owner's Handbook for Navi gation, Entertainment, Com munication 6

Seite 293

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

293Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17

W Warning and indicator lights,

see Check Control 113 Warning displays, see Check

Control 113 Warning messages, see Check

Control 113 Warning triangle 267 Warranty 8 Washer fluid 104 Washer nozzles, wind

shield 99, 103 Washing the vehicle 272 Water, hybrid system 49 Water on roads 207 Weights 281 Welcome lights 131 Welcome lights during unlock

ing 53 Wheel cleaner 274 Wheels, changing 235 Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 231 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 144 Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 139 Window defroster,

rear 179, 183 Windows, powered 69 Windshield cleaning sys

tem 97, 101 Windshield de

froster 179, 183 Windshield washer fluid 104 Windshield washer noz

zles 99, 103 Windshield wipers, fold-away

position 100, 103 Windshield wipers, see Wiper

system 97, 101 Winter storage, care 275 Winter tires, suitable tires 236 Winter tires, tread 234 Wiper blades, replacing 257

Wiper fluid 104 Wiper system 97, 101 Wireless charging dock, see

Owner's Handbook for Navi gation, Entertainment, Com munication 6

Wireless charging, see Wire less charging, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica tion 6

Wood, care 274 Word match concept, naviga

tion 24 Working on the hybrid sys

tem 49 Wrench 257

Seite 294

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z </

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the SE Countryman Mini works, you can view and download the Mini SE Countryman 2018 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Mini SE Countryman as well as other Mini manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mini SE Countryman. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mini SE Countryman 2018 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mini SE Countryman 2018 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mini SE Countryman 2018 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mini SE Countryman 2018 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mini SE Countryman 2018 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.